Home

1 - Silberauto

1. 15 mmobilizer Sentry Key 13 nfant Restraint 35 nflation Pressure Tires 167 nformation Center Vehicle 117 nside Rearview Mirror 49 nstrument Cluster 108 112 nstrument Panel and Controls 107 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 221 Integrated Power Module Fuses 224 Interior Appearance Care 220 Interior FUSES s ju de usa 221 Interior Lighting 83 Interior 245552558 my 83 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 85 Introductio see xum 4 Jack Location 193 Jack Operation 193 194 Jacking Instructions 194 Jump Starting 197 Key Programming 14 Key Replacement 14 Key Sentry Immobilizer 13 Key In Reminder 13 Keyless Entry System 15 IOVS Lan sue Danone 12 Knee Bolster mar Ea dessine es 28 Lap Shoulder Belts 22 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for Children 4 93 dece 37 38 atch s aa id E 42 Lead Free Gasoline 176 Leaks 42 Leveling Headlight 84 Liftgate ap donk Sv a aed 21 Liftgate Flipper Glass 21 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 102 Light BUDS be 42 Lights uem Ri x ck Be ET 42 80 s xvm 27 31 33 42 113 ANUELOCK
2. 122 Computer Trip Travel 119 Connector Ae e 126 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 126 Conserving Fuel 120 Console Overhead 96 Cooling System 211 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 213 Coolant Capacity 230 Coolant Level 214 Disposal of Used Coolant 213 Drain Flush and Refill 212 Inspection 212 Points to Remember 214 Pressure Cap 213 Radiator Cap 213 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 212 230 Cruise Light 115 Cupholders 100 Customer Assistance 260 Defroster Rear Window 103 Defroster Windshield 42 134 Diagnostic System Onboard 205 Diesel Fuel 178 Diesel Fuel Requirements 178 Dimmer Switch Headlight 83 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 217 Oil Engine 206 Power Steering 155 Disabled Vehicle Towing 198 Disposal Engine Oil bue nes 207 Door LOCKS sac 18 Door Locks Automatic 18 EE 152 Off Pavement 152 Off Road 152 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy ovio x 120 Electric Remote Mirrors 50 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 98
3. 21 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 100 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 149 Roll Over Warning 4 Roof Type Carrier 103 Rotation Tires 170 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 42 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 42 Safety Exhaust 41 Safety TOS 41 Schedule Maintenance 234 246 Seat Belt Reminder 26 Seat Belts 22 42 Adjustable Upper Shoulder ANCMORAGE i ae par ence a 25 And Pregnant Women 27 Child Restraint 35 39 Front SCAG usu Les Mia 22 Inspection s 42 Maintenance 221 PretensionerS 26 Render 2 44 ras d oce saut 115 Shoulder Belt Anchorage 25 SEATS fesse a Gok dues be Bey 72 Adjustment 72 CISANINQ uem hee xd 220 EASY ENUY uos hae 79 Head Restraints 74 Heated eva Roe ead 74 75 Lumbar Support 72 Memory v exem 77 POWER shui uude ip pk xam d 72 73 Rear Folding 3 24 ir das a 76 Reclining 72 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 114 Selection of Oil 207 Sentry Key Immobilizer 13 Sentry Key Programming 14 Sentry Key Replacement 14 Service Assistance 260 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicato
4. e Tire Chalns e crust ee e Treadwear Indicators ts rames Sees Replacement Directional Tread Pattern Tires If Equipped TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Non Directional Tires Only e TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS e Base Systom 225222222522 22222092022 140 STARTING PROCEDURE Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally in jured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move the ve hicle e Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death Normal Starting Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will con tinue to run and it will disengage automatically
5. WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway Hill Start Assist HSA 4WD Models With NV245 Two Speed Transfer Case Only The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 8 grade or greater hill 163 Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direc tion i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 896 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activ
6. qr dE same 113 Automatic Headlights 81 BackUp ux scere 228 Battery Saver 82 Brake Assist Warning 165 Brake Warning 112 Bulb Replacement 226 Cargo eque RI 100 Center Mounted Stop 229 DUL PE 115 Dimmer Switch Headlight 80 83 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 225 25 RR REG 165 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 115 m4 pa su rm 42 FOG gai um depo eh Heb ds 82 116 228 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 115 221 274 Hazard Warning Flasher 192 Headlight Leveling 84 Headlight Switch 80 Headlights o i e picea sau wea 226 227 Headlights On With Wipers 81 High Beam Indicator 113 Illuminated Entry 15 Instrument Cluster 80 IMNON 0 ee 83 Lights On Reminder 82 alfunction Indicator Check Engine 113 ap Reading 84 Oil Pressure 114 PaSSING a ep iaa h 83 Readingi saec bee Oe 84 96 Rear Fog snk epe era 82 229 Rear Servicing 228 Rearilall Laa sm ds aeb i 228 Seat Belt Reminder 115 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 114 Service 226 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 113 Side Marker 228 Side Repeater 228 Tow
7. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving ma neuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve hicles NOTE Anytime the ESP system is in the Full Off mode ERM is disabled Refer to ESP Elec tronic Stability Program for a complete ex planation of the available ESP modes 160 WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road conditions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve hicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be ex ploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer con dition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compar
8. OWNER REGISTRATION CERTIFICATE Selling Dealer OWNER Stamp ADDRESS Selling Dealer Signature Telephone Number Private Make Business Model have provided and explained the following Day pare oF REG Registration No or License No OPERATING MANUAL Vehicle Handbook VEHICLE PRE DELIVERY INSPECTION CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DEALER SIGNATURE TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 0 o x o la a o fF INTRODUCTION a o O a A A TR EL 3 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 43 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105 STARTING AND OPERATING 137 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 191 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE as su s d s vase d oscara cisne da ad ie did dia t a die 199 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES sus s des ae Ro dia d die da a da 233 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 257 INDEX asigna a
9. 1 Press the amp button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by uconnect voice For best re sults the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only 71 SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Front Manual Seat Adjustment ove the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment bar Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt
10. 113 does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light in spected by an authorized dealer 8 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM 9 Vehicle Security Light This light will flash rapidly for ap proximately 15 seconds when the o vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on 10 Oil Pressure Warning Light Cp This light indicates low engine oil pres sure The light should turn on momen tarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on 114 Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 11 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during acceleration apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your Speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP or Traction Control System TCS 12 Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level re
11. NOTE The passenger outside mirror does not have this dimming feature Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent posi tions full forward full rearward and normal 49 Power Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped Turn the power mirror knob all the way down to the left or right to fold in the mirrors Turn the knob back upward to the left mirror right mirror or off center position to the normal unfolded driving position ay B15b49a7 Power Mirror Knob Both mirrors will always move together and will fold anytime the knob is turned The ignition switch does not have to be in the ON position NOTE The power mirror knob must be used to return the mirror from the folded position 50 back to the normal driving position If the folded mirror is returned to the normal posi tion by external forces automated car wash equipment etc the operator must still use the power mirror switch button to return the mirror s power fold motors to the driving position Failure to do so will result in mirror shake during driving Outside M
12. WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disas semble or modify the system Seat belt as semblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage n the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to posi tion the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that Serves you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor age is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt an chorage to be adjusted in the upward posi tion without pressing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Energy Management Feature This ve
13. When to Use 4WD LOW Range If Equipped When off road driving shift to 4WD LOW for additional traction This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precau tions that must be considered before entering the water CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driving through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to enter ing Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave ef fects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in 23 cm The flowing water can erode the streambed causi
14. Overheating Engine 114 192 Preparation for Jacking 194 Occupant Restraints Be Ne 21 30 32 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 Pretensioners Occupant Restraints Sedan 28 30 31 Seat Belts 26 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 176 Paint Care 218 Programmable Electronic Features 124 Odometer Terr 115 Paint Damage RER dus get ded 518 Programming Transmitters es o a n Remote Keyless Entry 15 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 152 218 Park Sense System Front 90 Quadra Trac Radial Ply Tires Radio Operation Radio Sound Systems Rain Sensitive Wiper System Rear Axle Differential Rear Camera Rear Cupholder Rear Fog Lights Rear Heated Seats Rear Park Sense System Rear Seat Folding Rear Window Defroster Rear Window Features Rear Wiper Washer Rearview Mirrors Reclining Front Seats Recreational Towing Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral CINE ic d deret Meh ok Puke Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral NU cues eph gender eI dep E Refrigerant Reminder Lights On Reminder Seat Belt 276 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 15 Remote Sound System Radio CORUOIS S sa ios mp ares eden 129 Replacement Bulbs 226 Replacement Keys 14 Replacement Parts 205 Replacement Tires 169 Restraints Child 35 Restraints Occupant
15. 9006 Headlamps High Beam 9005 Rear Turn Stop Tail Lamps 3157K 226 NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlight switch off and the key fob removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID when the head lamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lamps This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Dual Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 1 Open the hood 2 Turn the low or high beam bulb one quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing 073305864 1 High Beam Bulb 2 Low Beam Bulb 3 Turn Signal Bul
16. D Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tT Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the transfer case fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 237 37 500 Miles 60 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 45 000 Miles 72 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repa
17. If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still ex ists If the system fault no longer exists the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driv ing next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message when a system fault is detected possibly related to the trigger compo nent In this case the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message is then followed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates the pressure values are still being received from the TPM Sensors However the system still needs to be serviced as long as the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message exists NOTE e If your vehicle is equipped with a match ing full size spare wheel and tire assem bly it has a tire pressure monitoring sen sor and be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition switch cycle will st
18. P abe the system the instrument OFF cluster will display the PARK AS SIST DISABLED message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the message The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is disabled or defective The Park Sense switch LED will be OFF when the System is enabled Service the ParkSense When ParkSense is defective the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 for further information The Park Sense display will also light the red LEDs indicating a problem Under this condition ParkSense will not operate f SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC after making sure the fascia bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer 93 Cleaning the ParkSense Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sen sors Otherwise you could damage the sen sors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the front and rear bumpers are free of dirt and
19. e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on in that list on he top line and the first item he second line To Exit List mode without selecting track press he same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob to ist the top menu item you wish to select and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the iPod then you can follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are avail able on this system MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE but ton is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod CAUTION e Leaving the iPod or any supported de vice anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow the device manufacturer s guidelines e Placing items on the iPod or connections to the iPod in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connec tors WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045003761 Remote Sound System Cont
20. pending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck under rides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle de celeration over time vehicle speed and dam age by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have de ployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec tronic parts of the system whenever the ignition Switch is in the START or ON position If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes discon nected prior to deployment Also t
21. Inspect the transfer case fluid Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Flush and replace the engine coolant antifreeze Replace accessory drive belt s Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic 255 256 258 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer distributors are vitally inter ested in your satisfaction with their products and services If a servicing problem or other difficulty should occur we recommend that you take the following steps Discuss the problem at the authorized dealer with the dealer principal or the service man ager Management personnel at the authorized dealer are in the best position to resolve the problem quickly When you contact the distributor please provide all of the following information e Your name address and phone number Vehicle Identification Number this 17 digit number is found on an etched plate or label located on the left front corner of the instru ment panel visible through the windshield It is also available from your vehicle registra tio
22. Replace the bulb 6 Engage the right hook of side repeater lamp into the sheet metal note correct orientation of lettering on lens 7 Rotate the side repeater lamp in place until the left side engages you will hear a light Click Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Backup Lamps 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Remove the two Torx fasteners 81572594 3 Squeeze the socket assembly tabs to re move it from the housing 4 Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket 5 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the lamp assembly Rear Fog Lamps 1 Reach behind the rear fascia from under the vehicle 2 Turn the rear fog lamp bulb one quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and re place bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 1 Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL 815727fa 2 Twist the bulb socket to remove from the CHMSL housing 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket 4 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the CHMSL 229 FLUID CAPACITIES Formula or equivalent With Rear Heat U S Metric Fuel Approximate 3 7L and 5 7L Gasoline Engines 21 Gal
23. Six Espanol select phone select seven Francais send eight German Deutsch set up phone settings or nine help phone set up asterisk star home transfer call plus Italian Italiano Tutorial hash 8 language try again all all of them list names voice training system training Breakdown service list phones Work call main menu return to main menu yes cancel mobile confirmation prompts confirmation mute on continue mute off delete new entry dial no VOICE RECOGNITION VR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition VR System Operation e This Voice Recognition system al lows you to control your AM FM radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death When you press the s button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a com mand NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system whil
24. Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list These restraints may be of the specific vehicle restricted semi universal categories B Built in restraint approved for the age weight group X Seat position not suitable for children in this age weight group Children 12 years and under should ride prop erly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants and Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible c
25. When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Flash Lamps with Lock When YES Y is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When YES Y is selected and the headlight Switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N ap pears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the day time causes the instrument panel lights to dim To incre
26. as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Maintenance After Off Road Driving After extended operation in mud sand or water or similar dirty conditions have your brake discs brake linings and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon as possible This will prevent any abrasive material from causing excessive wear or unpredictable braking ac tion After driving off road completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check the tires body structure steering suspension and ex haust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and suspension Retighten if required to torque values specified in the Service Manual Also check for accumulations of vegetation or brush that could become a fire hazard or conceal damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts CAUTION Under frequent heavy duty driving conditions change all lubricants and lubricate body com ponents all driveline joints and steering link age more often than in normal service to prevent excessive wear Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly cor rosive to the
27. be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle have com bination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sud den stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is danger ous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Continued WARNING Continued e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehi
28. ea i ere uns ga ete De do RP seems rene BP 269 INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it repre sents precision workmanship distinctive styl ing and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This is a specialized utility vehicle designed for both on road and off road use It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional two wheel drive vehicles were not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual and all the Supplements Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering and transmission and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience but as in driving any vehicle take it easy as you begin When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload it or expect it to overcome the forces of nature Always observe local laws wherever you drive 4 As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Be sure to read the On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Section 5 of this manual NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in
29. might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Front Seat Adjustment Recline To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever at the desired position To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located on the right side of the driver s seat back all models and on the left side of the passenger s seatback if equipped Moving the lumbar control lever forward and rearward will increase or decrease the lumbar support Manual Lumbar Control Eight Way Driver s Power Seat The driver s power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the driver s seat The bottom switch controls up down forward rearward and tilt adjustment The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment Power Seat Switches WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injur
30. permanent damage to your vehicle 177 Clean Air Gasoline Many gasolines are now being blended that contribute to cleaner air especially in those areas where air pollution levels are high These new blends provide a cleaner burning fuel and some are referred to as reformulated gaso line The manufacturer supports these efforts toward cleaner air You can help by using these blends as they become available Materials Added to Fuel Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating gasolines that contain detergents corrosion and stability additives are recommended Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy reduce emissions and maintain vehicle perfor mance Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided Many of these ma terials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredi ents These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials 178 WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to pre vent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the ve hicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short
31. tioning operating conditions Cooling System n unusual situations involving grossly malfunc tioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst over heating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service includ ing a tuneup to manufacturer s specifications should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot 211 Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protec tion every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the en gine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant antifreeze Check the front of the A C con denser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears c
32. with the multifunction lever Wiper delay posi tion 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Settings 4 and 5 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position The Rain Sensing feature may not func tion properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance A customer programmable feature in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC allows the Rain Sensing feature to be turned off Refer to Rain Sensing Wiper under Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Customer Program mable Features in Section 4 of this manual The Rain Sensing system has protection fea tures for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing System will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than mph 0 km h or the outside temperature is greater than 32 F 0 e Transmission in NEUTRAL Position When the ignition
33. you will need to reference your cellular phone owner s manual The uconnect website may also pro vide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to uconnect phone pairing instructions e Press the to button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the uconnect phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 with 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your uconnect phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your uconnect phone The priority allows the uconnect phone to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example 53 if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the uconnect phone will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can
34. 219 matic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the follow ing manner Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products 220 Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Leather Seat Care And Cleaning MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifi cally recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and dam
35. Amp power outlets that can be used to power cellu lar phones small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories The power out lets are labeled with either a key or a battery symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered Power outlets labeled with a key are powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position while the outlets labeled with a bat tery are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times NOTE e All accessories connected to the bat tery powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against dis charge To ensure proper operation MOPAR knob and element must be used Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced The front power outlets are located to the left and right of the convenience tray lower center of instrument panel Pull lightly on the tab of the plastic cover to access these power outlets Front Power Outlets The power outlet located on the left side of the tray can be used to power a conventional cigar lighter The rear power outlet if equipped is located in the left rear cargo area Rear Power Outlet WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt o
36. Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic butcan Automatic Operation Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature be overridden knobs for Comfort Blower Preferred Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature knobs for Comfort Mode Preferred and Set mode knob to any desired Automatic Although Manual Manual automatic User selectable User selectable Manual Air Temperature air delivery point Adjust Auto Lo or Hi can be control of air temperature outside or on or off Control Temperature knobs to select selected a manually is disabled User must recirculated the desired temperature selected airflow level adjust temperature is reccommend for knobs to obtain the the optimum comfort desired temperature Full Manual Set blower knob to any desired Manual Manual Manual automatic User selectable User selectable Operation airflow level other than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Adjust Temperature knobs to select the desired temperature control of air temperature is disabled User must adjust temperature knobs to obtain the desired temperature outside or recirculated on or off Manual Air Temperature Control Operation When the Mode knob is set to any position other than Auto the Temperature knob operates in the
37. Cargo Cover WARNING Cargo Tie Down Hooks limits described on the label attached to the In an accident a loose cargo cover in the 5 Lac cargo vehicle could cause injury It could fly around WARNING floor Put heavier ebiscts as lowand as tar in a sudden stop and strike someone in the To help protect against personal injury mai ds 2 vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the passengers not be seated in the Place as much cargo as possible in front of cargo floor or in the passenger compartment 2 bo bod eer the rear axle Too much weight or improperly Remove the cover from the vehicle when intended for load carrying purposes only placed weight over or behind the rear axle rd from its mounting Do not store it in the 1 who should sit seats can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway vehicle Continued Continued 101 WARNING Continued Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision Cargo Load Floor The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility One side is carpeted and the other side features a plastic lined tray which holds a variety of items Cargo Load Floor 102 The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches In order to use the cargo load floor use the following procedure NOTE The cargo load fl
38. Distribution Center 8 Engine Oil Fill 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Air Cleaner Filter 5 Integrated Power Module 202 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Power Distribution Center 9 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Integrated Power Module 11 Air Cleaner Filter 6 Battery 203 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 0L DIESEL 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 Power Distribution Center 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 4 Integrated Power Module 5 Battery 070707115 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Fill 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 204 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Your vehicle is equipped with sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This System monitors the performance of the emis Sions engine and automatic transmission con trol systems When these systems are operat ing properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current govern ment regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD Il system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnos tic codes and other information to assist your service technic
39. Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air condi tioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt condition should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air con ditioning system as the chemicals can dam age your air conditioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri cants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system Some unap proved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs e The air conditioning system contains refrig erant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C Sys tem Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Con ditioners Compressor Oil and Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro fluorocarbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and is
40. ETC 300 220 but has addi tional unique requirements Other defined re quirements are noted in ANNEX VI of COMMIS SION DIRECTIVE 95 56 EC Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interfer ence e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 17 If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two condi tions 1 Weak battery in RKE transmitter The ex pected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door wil ock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door WARNING For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an un locked vehicle Unsupervised use of ve hicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death Power Door Locks
41. If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift into RE VERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires 153 WARNING If the engine stalls you lose forward motion or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down f the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4WD LOW range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle Speed and direction 154 When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking co
42. On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the uconnect phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it Press the 2 button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The uconnect phone will play the current con firmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the uconnect phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using uconnect phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone bat tery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the uconnect phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dial ing a number with your paired Bluetooth cel lular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The uconnect phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the uconnect phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not he
43. Other designs may result in unsatisfac tory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be peri odically inspected Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper mainte nance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Fluid Level Check Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood ser vice or immediately if the brake system warn ing lamp indicates system failure The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reservoir On the outboard side of the reservoir there is a MAX dot and a MIN dot The fluid level must be kept within these two dots Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap With disc brakes the fluid level can be ex pected to fall as the brake linings wear How ever an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING e Use only manufacturers r
44. The power door lock switch is located on each front door panel Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and the driver s door is open the doors will not lock The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle until you pull up the lock plungers Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature If Equipped If Auto Unlock is enabled this feature will unlock all the doors when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL Refer to Auto Unlock on Exit under the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in section 4 of this manual or see your authorized dealer Automatic Door Locks If this feature is selected your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and all doors are closed It will reset whenever a door is opened This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off Refer to Auto Door Locks under Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual or see your autho rized dealer Child Protection Door Lock The rear doors of your vehicle are equipped with Child Protection Door Locks If you push up on th
45. To Vary the Speed Setting 89 To Accelerate for Passing 90 e PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST ee ua SER RUE SE cie 90 Rear ParkSense If Equipped 90 Rear ParkSense Sensors 91 Rear ParkSense Warning Display 91 Front ParkSense If Equipped 92 e Front ParkSense Sensors Front ParkSense Warning Display Enable Disable ParkSense Service the ParkSense e Cleaning the ParkSense ParkSense System Usage Precautions e PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Turning ParkView On or Off With Navigation Radio Turning ParkView On or Off Without Navigation Radio o OVERHEAD CONSOLE lt n ronnan a 2e Courtesy Reading Lights e Sunglasses Storage e POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED Opening Sunroof Express Closing Sunroof Express e Pinch Protect Feature e Pinch Protect Override Venting Sunroof Express e Sunshade Operation uWindlBulleting Tr e Sunroof Maintenance 96
46. Track to play the previous track e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the follow ing commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the TM button to stop recording You pro ceed by saying one of the following com mands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the Tu button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos System Setup To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language German e Language Dutch e Language Italian e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the sys tem recognizing their voice commands or num bers the uconnect voice Voice Training feature may be used
47. an ozone saving product However the manu facturer recommends that air conditioning ser vice be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recy cling equipment Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubri cated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lu bricant or equivalent directly into the lock cyl inder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner to remove accumulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may c
48. another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents capabilities of an ABS equipped ve hicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the users safety or the safety of others CAUTION The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele phones 158 NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the ABS is functioning e Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on the pedal This could overheat the brakes and result in unpredictable braking action longer stopping distances or brake dam age e When descending mountains or hills re peated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis Sion or locking out overdrive whenever pos sible e Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm up which could cause rear wheels to Spin and result in loss of vehicle control Be especially careful while driving on slippery roads in close quarter maneuvering park ing or stopping e Do not drive too fast for road conditions especially when roads are wet or slushy A wedge of water can build up between the tire tread and the road This hydroplaning act
49. att 72 Front Manual Seat Adjustment 72 Front Seat Adjustment Recline 72 Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment 72 Eight Way Drives Power Seat 72 Four Way Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped 73 enmeadiBestraintS 74 Front Heated Seats If Equipped 74 Rear Heated Seats If Equipped 75 160 40 Split Rear Seats tu a eave UE ens 76 e DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED 7T Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory 78 Memory Position Recall 78 To Disable a Transmitter Linked to Memory 79 46 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 85 Windshield Wiper Operation 85 e Intermittent Wiper System 85 e Windshield Washer Operation 86 COIS sas Sho duis eens wee oS a ao 7 86 e Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 86 HEADLIGHT WASHERS IF EQUIPPED 87 e TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN 87 e ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED 88 e ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 89 exTo Activate 89 To Set a Desired Speed 89 exrolDeactivate TCI 89 e To Resume Speed eee ee 89 e
50. belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more informa 22 tion on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH in this section NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the informa tion in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buck led up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should
51. chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable In an emergency evasive maneu ver the ESP and ERM systems will not en gage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off ESP mode is intended for off road use only 4WD Low Range Full Off This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOW range Whenever the vehicle is started in AWD LOW range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range the ESP system will be in this Full Off mode In 4WD LOW range ESP and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km h At 40 mph 64 km h the normal ESP stability function returns but TCS remains off When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is deactivated at low vehicle speeds in 4WD LOW range so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESP func tion returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESP TCS Indicator Light will always be illuminated in 4WD LOW range when ESP is off NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the a
52. cm Red Yes Continuous NOTE Front ParkSense will remember the last sys Front ParkSense Sensors tem state enabled or disabled from the last The six Front ParkSense sensors located in The ParkSense system will MUTE the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone Front ParkSense If Equipped Front ParkSense provides audio and visual indications of the distance between the front fascia bumper and the detected obstacle when driving forward Refer to the Warning Section and Note Section for limitations of this system and recommendations 92 ignition cycle when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position Front ParkSense can be active when the shift lever is in REVERSE or DRIVE If the Front ParkSense is enabled the system will be active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The System will be active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approxi mately 10 mph 16 km h the front fascia bumper monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The monitored area seems oval in shape The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 11 8 in 30 cm up to 59 in 150 cm from the front fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location and orientation of the obstacle and the type of obstacle Front ParkSense Warning Display The Front ParkSense warning display located on th
53. driving maneuvers Do not drive for prolonged periods on dry pavement NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a pro longed period of time on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s in structions on method of installation operat ing speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and ve hicle manufacturer suggest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains Treadwear Indicators These indicators are narrow strips 1 16 in 1 6 mm thick and are found in the tread pattern grooves When the tread pattern is worn down to these treadwear indicators the tires should be re placed 066007676 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire Overloading your vehicle long trips in very hot weather and driving on bad roads may result in greater wear Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style lire pressure Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to l
54. engine air cleaner ilters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient 208 service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance ree battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area immediately with large amounts of water e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the bat tery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related acces sories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling CAUTION e Itis essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is at tached to the positive post and the nega tive cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and identified on the battery case e Ifa fast charger is used while battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery
55. engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual DRIVE This range should only be selected when the vehicle is at a complete stop and the brakes are firmly applied The transmission automati cally upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows you to move the shift lever left or right when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position allowing you to limit the highest available gear For example if the driver shifts the transmission 146 into ERS 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but can shift down to 2 second or 1 first when needed NOTE e If you pull and hold not tap the shift lever to the left the transmission will down shift to the lowest gear that can be at tained without overrevving the engine The display will show the gear the vehicle is in and will limit the top gear to the one displayed e If you pull and hold not tap the shift lever to the right 4 the transmission will exit the g
56. exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equip ment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in com bination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the ve hicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force ex erted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 7 or more than 10 of the trailer load Tongue weight must not exceed the lesser of either the hitch certification rating or the trailer tongue chassis rating It should never be less than 4 of the trailer load and not less than 5
57. gasoline having an octane range of 91 to 95 The manufacturer recom mends the use of 95 octane for optimum per formance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the Worldwide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufac turer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications if they are available Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating gasolines that contain detergents corrosion and stability additives are recommended Using gasolines that have these additives may help improve fuel economy reduce emissions and maintain ve hicle performance Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and stumble If you experience these problems try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Metha
58. glove compart ment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 81c0f01e 1 Driver Airbag 2 Passenger Airbag 3 Knee Bolster NOTE These airbags are certified to regulations for Advanced Airbags The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Airbag Warning Light e Driver Front Airbag 2f Front Passenger Airbag Front and Side Impact Sensors Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Front Seat Belt Pretensioners if equipped e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Cur tains SABIC if equipped Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multi stage driver and front passenger airbags This System provides output appropriate to the se verity and type of collision as determined by the Occ
59. good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges under ground cables railroad tracks etc 121 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn on the ignition switch 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features menu is reached 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 122 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indi cator will be displayed in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console This is where the compass sensor is located 12 co
60. in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident roll over of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK 80bfeOf0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up IMPORTANT NOTICE ALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLI CATION IS BASED ON THE LATEST INFORMA TION AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLICATION APPROVAL THE RIGHT IS RESERVED TO PUBLISH REVISIONS AT ANY TIME This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering spe cialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supple mented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Fol lowing the instructions and recommendations in this Owner s Manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle After you have read the Owners Manual it should be stored
61. in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or to make additions to or improvements in its products without imposing any obligations upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured The Owner s Manual illustrates and describes the features that are standard or available as extra cost options Therefore some of the equipment and accessories in this publication may not appear on your vehicle NOTE Be sure to read the Owner s Manual first before driving your vehicle and before at taching or installing parts accessories or making other modifications to the vehicle In view of the many replacement parts and accessories from various manufacturers avail able on the market the manufacturer cannot be certain that the driving safety of your vehicle will not be impaired by the attachment or instal lation of such parts Even if such parts are officially approved for example by a general operating permit for the part or by constructing the part in an officially approved design or if 5 an individual operating permit was issued for the vehicle after the attachment or installation of such parts it cannot be implicitly assumed that the driving safety of your vehicle is unim paired Therefore neither experts nor official agencies are liable Therefore the manufacturer only assumes responsibili
62. metal in your vehicle The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or re moval of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or re moval of paint and decals Special Care e f you drive on salted or dusty roads or
63. minutes of continuous opera tion At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The Low level setting will turn Off automatically after approximately 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the Skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medi cation alcohol use exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could dam age the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat Rear Heated Seats If Equipped On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats the seats closest to the doors are heated The controls for these seats are located on the rear of the center console Rear Heated Seat Switches After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illum
64. or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufactur er s directions exactly when installing an in fant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belts The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or automatic lock ing retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary For seat belts having an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section n the rear seat you may have trouble tighten ing the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Discon nect the latch plate from the buckle and t
65. overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the off can help remove this heat You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supple ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dan gerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift e The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service pur poses The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located in the passenger side compart ment behind the
66. pe riod adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust System inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions re paired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Continued WARNING Continued Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from enter ing the vehicle FUEL REQUIREMENTS DIESEL ENGINE Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier For most year round service No 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D 975 Grade 515 will provide good performance If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold below 20 F or 7 C or is required to operate at colder than normal conditions for prolonged periods use climatized No 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No 2 diesel fuel with 50 No 1 diesel fuel This will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax plugging of the fuel filters This vehicle is fully compatible with biodie sel blends up to 5 biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D 975 CAUTION The manufacturer requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel 15 ppm Sulfur maximum and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Die sel fuel 500 ppm Sulfur maximum to avoid damage to the emissions control system WARNIN
67. previous and next tracks e button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles be tween Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below takes you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod e Turning it clockwise forward and coun terclockwise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio dis play press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning he TUNE control knob fast will scroll hrough the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating he information on the radio display During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the rack is at the bottom of the list just turn he wheel backwards counter clockwise o get to the track faster In List mode the radio PRESET Buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks Preset 6 Podcasts
68. prospect 125167 Moscow Tel 7 495 745 2600 Fax 7 495 745 2601 SLOVENIA Chrysler Jeep Import d d Leskoskova 2 1122 Ljubljana Tel 01 5843 138 Fax 01 5843 222 SPAIN Chrysler Espa a S L Dpto De Atenci n al Cliente Chrysler Jeep y Dodge Apdo De Correos 24 19200 Azuqueca de Henares Guadalajara Tel 902 888 782 Fax 913 496 529 SWEDEN Chrysler Sverige Bronsyxegatan 14 Box 50530 S 202 50 Malm Tel 46 0 8 752 9858 Fax 46 0 8 752 6483 SWITZERLAND Chrysler Switzerland GmbH Bernstrasse 55 CH 8952 Schlieren Tel e German 0800 80 29 20 e French 0800 80 29 21 e Italian 0800 80 29 22 Telefax 41 0 44 755 64 00 TAIWAN Chrysler Taiwan Co LTD 13th Floor Union Enterprise Plaza 1109 Min Sheng East Road Section 3 Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 080081581 Fax 886225471871 TURKEY Chrysler Jeep Tic A S TEM Otoyolu Hadimkoy Cikisi 34900 Buyukcekmece Istanbul Tel 90 212 867 40 00 Fax 90 212 867 44 63 UKRAINE JSC AutoCapital Velyka Vasylkivska str 15 01004 Kyiv Tel 38 044 206 8888 Fax 38 044 206 8889 UNITED KINGDOM Chrysler UK Ltd Tongwell Milton Keynes MK15 8BA Tel 01908 301090 Fax 01908 301203 URUGUAY Malunix S A Miguelete 2276 Montevideo Uruguay Tel 598 2 401 7818 Fax 598 2 402 2666 VENEZUELA Chrysler de Venezuela LLC Avenida Pancho Pepe Croquer Zona Industrial Norte Valencia Estado Caraboro Tel 5
69. result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 179 WARNING e Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap slowly to prevent fuel spray from the filler neck which may cause injury The volatility of some gasolines may cause a buildup of pressure in the fuel tank that may increase while you drive This pres sure can result in a spray of gasoline and or vapors when the cap is removed from a hot vehicle Removing the cap slowly allows the pressure to vent and prevents fuel spray Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is re moved or the tank filled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running Afire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling 180 NOTE Tighten the gas cap until you hear clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is ti
70. second row seat Jack Storage Location Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by means of a cable winch mechanism To remove or stow the spare use the jack handle to rotate the spare tire drive nut The nut is located under a plastic cover at the center rear of the cargo floor area just inside the liftgate opening CAUTION Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism Lowering Raising Spare Tire 193 Spare Tire Removal Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut Use the lug wrench to rotate the nut counter clockwise until the spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you to pul the tire out from under the vehicle CAUTION e The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch e When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel Preparations for Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery surfaces 194 WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Set the parking brake 3 Place the shift lever into PAR
71. should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your local authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement 207 filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before start ing the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement
72. specified engine coolant antifreeze as Soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine cool ant antifreeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows ex tended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to 5 Years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended main tenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MO PAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 5096 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are antici pated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water
73. than 3 mph 5 km h the transfer case will not allow the shift NEUTRAL N Shift Procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position engine off 2 Vehicle stopped with foot on brake 3 Place transmission into NEUTRAL 4 Hold down the NEUTRAL N pin switch with a pen etc for four seconds until the LED lamp by the switch starts to blink indicating shift in progress The lamp will stop blinking stay on solid when the NEUTRAL N shift is complete A 4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL message will display on the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center Section 4 of this manual Neutral Switch 5 Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL N 151 NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met a CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURES message will flash from the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Quadra Drive System If Equipped The optional Quadra Drive System features three torque transfer couplings The couplings include ELSD Electronic Limited Slip Differen tial front and rear axles and Quadra Trac 119 transfer case The optional ELSD axles are fully automatic and require no driver input to oper ate Under normal driving conditions the units function as standard axles balancing torque evenly between left and righ
74. the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every uconnect phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages For command translations and alternate com mands in supported languages refer to Com mand Translations Emergency Assistance If Equipped If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect V phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the uconnect phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number NOTE e The default number is 112 The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area e If supported this number be pro grammable on some systems To do this press the o button and say Setup fol lowed by Emergency e The uconnect phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully mak ing a phone call as to that for the cellular phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the uconnect phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cellu
75. the rear fascia when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON Also the ParkSense sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the Park View Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the Navigation Multimedia radio display screen The ParkView camera is located on the rear iftgate WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death CAUTION e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only be used as a parking aid The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path Continued 95 CAUTION Continued To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recommended that the driver look fr
76. the vehicle for convenient refer encing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds or while intoxicated may result in loss of control collision with other vehicles or objects going off the road or overturning any of which may lead to serious injury or death Also failure to use seat belts subjects the driver and passen gers to a greater risk of injury or death To keep your vehicle running at its best have your vehicle serviced at recommended inter vals by an authorized dealer or distributor who has the qualified personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service The manufacturer and its distributors are vitally interested in your complete satisfaction with this vehicle If you encounter a service or warranty problem which is not resolved to your satisfaction discuss the matter with your autho rized dealer or distributors management Your authorized dealer or distributor will be happy to assist you with any questions about your vehicle ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven
77. three hours or driven less than a mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum values molded into the tire sidewall Tire pressures may increase from 2 to 6 psi 0 14 to 0 41 bar 14 to 41 kPa during opera tion DO NOT reduce this normal pressure buildup High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds correc tire inflation pressure is very important Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Always use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your dealer for radial tire re pairs Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice condi tions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure A tire could ex plode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tir
78. time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone uconnect phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the uconnect phone features press the 9 and say uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the uconnect phone recognizing their voice com mands or numbers the uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two follow ing procedures From outside the uconnect phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the t button for five sec onds until the session begins or e Press the iS button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched OFF This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least Y in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the
79. tire assem bly it has a tire pressure monitoring sen sor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition switch cycle will still show the TIRE LOW PRESSURE mes sage and a chime to sound Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn off the TIRE LOW PRESSURE message as long as none of the road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will still be dis played After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed For each subsequent ignition Switch cycle a chime will sound and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure war
80. to park If the liftgate flipper glass is open connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted prevent ing activation of the rear wiper blade When the liftgate flipper glass is closed the rear wiper Switch or the ignition switch needs to be turned OFF and ON to restart the rear wiper Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mir rors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an ad ditional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the win dow Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating ele ments Labels can be peeled off after soak ing with warm water e Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Continued CAUTION Continued e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window ROOF LUGGAGE
81. to Memory under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 for more information Easy Entry Exit Seat This feature provides automatic drivers seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle There are two possible Easy Entry Exit adjust ments available The seat cushion will move rearward ap proximately 2 5 in 60 mm if the starting position of the seat is greater than or equal to 2 67 in 68 mm forward of the rear seat stop when the key is removed from the ignition Switch The seat will then move forward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position e The seat will move to the position located 0 3 in 8 mm forward of the rear stop if the starting position is between 0 9 to 2 67 in 23 to 68 mm forward of the rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward to the memory driving position when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position toward the ACC ON position The Easy Entry Exit feature will be automatically disabled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0 9 in 23 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit Entry Each stored memory setting will have an asso ciated Easy Entry Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Ex
82. to free a stuck vehicle CAUTION When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving between First and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION Quadra Trac Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped The Quadra Trac 11 transfer case provides three mode positions e 4WD HI NEUTRAL e AWD LOW Quaara Trac 119 transfer case is fully auto matic in the normal driving 4WD HI mode 149 When additional traction is required the 4WD LOW position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOW position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI position at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road cond
83. vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 7 pin or a 13 pin wiring harness Use a factory ap proved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector 81789d4e 7 Pin Connector Pin Function Wire Color Number 1 Left Turn Signal Yellow 2 Rear Fog Light Blue 3 Ground White Common Return 4 Right Turn Green Signal 185 Marker Lights and Rear Regis tration Plate Illumination Device Pin Function Wire Color Number 5 Right Rear Brown Position Side Marker Lights and Rear Regis tration Plate Illumination Device 6 Stop Lights Red 7 Left Rear Black Position Side 13 Pin Connector 81789461 Number Function Wire Color Right Rear Position Side Marker Lights and Rear Regis tration Plate Illumination Device Brown Stop Lights Red The rear position registration plate illumina tion device shall be connected such that no light of the device has a
84. vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 144 WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could acceler ate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the ignition Switch to the LOCK position The key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis sion Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the igni tion switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition Switch must be turned to the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Brake Tra
85. weight of the driver and load does not exceed the maximum load ca pacity of the vehicle Calculations based on a passenger weight of 165 lbs 75 kg WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a Switch located on the end of the lever For information on the rear wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in this section 036407502 Windshield Wiper Washer Switch Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for low speed wiper operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for high speed wiper operation 031507503 Front Wiper Control CAUTION Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the park position If the wind shield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the park position damage to the wiper motor may occur Intermittent Wiper System Use one of the five intermittent wiper speeds when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Turn the end of the lever to one of the five delay positions for the desired delay inter val The delay can be regulated from a maxi mum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every 1 2 second 031507503 Front Wiper Cont
86. weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options dealer installed options must be consid ered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the drivers door pillar for the maximum combined weight of occu pants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h 183 WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury acci dent Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
87. will improve performance and re duce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When oper ating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will shift into direct gear and Overdrive will be enabled under steady cruise conditions 051207015 TOW HAUL Switch 148 The TOW HAUL indicator light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the Switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnor mal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the Trans mission Limp Home Mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear 3 7L and 3 0L diesel engine or in direct gear 5 7L engine until the vehicle is brought to a stop To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever into the PARK position 3 Turn the engine off and be sure to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the engine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the trans mission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NEU TRAL will continue to oper
88. with graphic WASHER FLUID LOW with graphic COOLANT LOW with graphic CHECK GAUGES PARK ASSIST DISABLED SERVICE SUSPENSION SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURE SERVICE 4WD SYSTEM 4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING LIMIT SPEED CHECK GASCAP ESP OFF OD FUSE OUT HILL DESCENT CONTROL EMORY 1 POSITIONS SET EMORY 2 POSITIONS SET EMORY SYSTEM DISABLED SEATBELT BUCKLED with graphic EMORY SYSTEM DISABLED VEHICLE NOT IN PARK DRIVER 1 MEMORY DRIVER 2 MEMORY ADJ PEDALS DISABLED CRUISE CON TROL SET ADJ PEDALS DISABLED SHIFTER IN REVERSE SERVICE KEYLESS SYS RKE BATTERY LOW TIRE LOW PRESSURE CHECK TPM SYSTEM LEFT FRONT LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM System Only RIGHT FRONT LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM System Only LEFT REAR LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM System Only RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM System Only SPARE LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM Sys tem Only WATER IN FUEL Diesel Models Only e SERVICE EXHAUST Diesel Models Only e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Re quired message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next sched uled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is dut
89. 0 6201 CHINA Chrysler Group China Sales Limited 16F Gemdale Plaza Tower A No 91 Jian Guo Road Chaoyang District Beijing 100022 P R China Chrysler Brand Tel 400 650 1195 Dodge Brand Tel 400 650 0118 COLOMBIA Chrysler Colombia S A Avenida Calle 26 70A 25 Bogot Colombia Tel 57 1 4236700 Fax 57 1 410 5667 COSTA RICA AutoStar La Uruca frente al Banco Nacional San Jos Costa Rica Tel 506 295 0000 Fax 506 295 0052 CROATIA EUROLINE d o o Kovinska 5 10 000 Zagreb Tel 385 1 3441 111 Fax 385 1 3441 113 CZECH REPUBLIC Chrysler Czech Republic s r o Daimlerova 2296 2 149 45 Praha 4 Chodov Czech Republic Tel 420 0 2 71077 111 Tel 420 0 2 25101 111 Fax 420 0 2 71077 507 DENMARK Chrysler Danmark ApS Frederikskaj 4 DK 1790 K benhavn V Tel 45 0 35 256 830 Fax 45 0 35 256 832 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC Reid y Compa ia John F Kennedy Casi Esq Lope de Vega Santo Domingo Dominican Republic Tel 809 562 7211 Fax 809 565 8774 261 ECUADOR Chrysler Jeep Automotriz del Ecuador Av Juan Tanca Marengo km 4 5 Guayaquil Ecuador Tel 593 4 225 7935 Fax 593 4 224 7787 EL SALVADOR Grupo Q del Salvador Blvd Los Pr ceres y Avenida No 1 Lomas de San Francisco San Salvador El Salvador Tel 503 22730988 Fax 503 278 5731 ESTONIA Silberauto AS Jarvevana tee 11 11314 Tallinn Tel 06 266 098 Tel 06 266 050 Fax 06 26
90. 0 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit un der Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leav ing unattended children in a vehicle is danger ous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the Key Fob in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the LOCK or ACC ignition position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key9 Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses the factory mated Key Fob with Remote Keyless
91. 13 Airbag Maintenance 33 Airbag Side 30 31 Airbag Window Side Curtain 28 30 31 Alarm Security Alarm 114 Alarm System Security Alarm 14 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 230 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 157 159 Anti Lock Warning Light 113 Anti Theft System 114 Appearance Care 218 Assist Hill Start 270 Auto Down Power Windows 19 Automatic Dimming Mirror 49 Automatic Door Locks 18 Automatic Headlights 81 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 131 Automatic Transmission 145 216 Adding Fluid 217 Fluid and Filter Changes 216 Fluid Level Check 217 Fluid TYDS sua eR 216 Special Additives 217 Torque Converter 148 AULOSUCK RE ee 146 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet sue e822 2 aad ae wk 98 Auxiliary Power Outlet 98 Battery saa e an 208 Emergency Starting 197 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE O do dr OR 17 Saving Feature Protection 82 Belts Seat 22 42 Body Mechanism Lubrication 209 Brake Assist System 159 Brake Control System Electronic 158 Brake Fluid i sas ERES 215 Brake System 215 Anti Lock ABS 157 15
92. 131 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 114 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 37 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 101 Tilt Steering Column 87 Time Delay Headlight 83 des 143 Uc y 55 e 42 166 Air Pressure ou a 167 zs ses 167 CHANGING sse eed 193 High Speed 167 Inflation Pressures 167 JACKING uas 193 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 170 Radial xm agis mend kt 167 Replacement 54 85 cakes 169 ROTATION D I E 170 Spare Tire 193 SPINNING duos paia ax 167 Tread Wear Indicators 168 Wheel Mounting 196 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 183 Torque Converter Clutch 148 Tow Haul Indicator Light 115 TOWING e cs 180 198 Disabled Vehicle 198 GUIDE 95 Lets due A sun 183 Recreational 188 WEINE harte Agee 183 Towing Eyes 198 Traction Control 159 Trailer Sway Control TSC 163 Trailer Towing 180 Cooling System Tips 187 FINCHES 5 4 an LE Ry bs 187 Minimum Requirements 183 Trailer and Tongue Weight 183 WINO 2k RE 2 2 2 185 Trailer Towing Guide 183 Trailer Weight 183 Transfer Case 216 Maintenance 2
93. 16 Transmission Automate 4 4 Ba ah ang 145 216 Maintenance 216 ases cem dk 144 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 17 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 15 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE eee rase nee S 15 Tread Wear Indicators 168 Turn Signals 83 113 227 228 UCI Conn ctor 126 uconnect Hands Free Phone 51 278 Underhood Fuses 223 224 Universal Consumer Interface UCI COMMECION ques Sate weed Eds 126 Upholstery Care 220 Vanity Mirrors 51 Variance Compass 122 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage 135 225 Viscosity Engine Oll 206 207 Voice Recognition System VR 69 Warning Flasher Hazard 192 Warning Roll Over 4 Warnings and Cautions 8 Washers Headlight 87 Washers Windshield 85 210 Washing Vehicle 219 Waxing and Polishing 219 Wheel and Wheel Trim 219 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 219 Wheel Mounting 196 Wind Buffeting 20 98 Window Fogging 135 WINDOWS ese min tee 19 POWER eed te eR d 19 Windshield Defroster 42 134 Windshie
94. 16 pin connector port e The iPod audio can be played on the vehi cle s sound system providing metadata art ist track title album etc information on the radio display e The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector if supported by the specific iPod device Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod auto matically starts Play mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list Turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the begin ning of the current track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough will take you to the begin
95. 49 Change Interval 206 seo oh ES Bee RS 40 Heated saime bes 50 Diesel 2 213 we en 207 Pets Transporting 40 Outside 4 4444 4444484444 50 DipSticK 444 we cg 206 Phone Cellular 51 Rearview 49 j P PP 207 Phone Hands Free uconnect 51 A bd Boh o ma 51 Identification Logo 206 Polishing and Waxing 219 ode Materials Added to 207 Power Fuel Saver 120 Recommendation 206 207 230 Distribution Center Fuses 223 odifications Alterations Vehicle 8 ius se Durs 207 Door LOCKS is nequa meh SS 18 onitor Tire Pressure System 170 Viscosity 206 207 230 xe due au 50 2 2 2 4 5424 205 Onboard Diagnostic System 205 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 98 ulti Displacement Engine System 156 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 SEAS a uoo debe GA 72 73 ulti Function Control Lever 80 Outside Rearview Mirrors 50 Steering 155 Overdrive 147 SUNIOOE ads Saye 97 New Vehicle Break In Period 40 Overdrive OFF Switch 147 WINDOWS ER de 19 Overhead Console 96 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 27
96. 5 Ibs 25 kg You must consider tongue load as part of the oad on your vehicle and its GAWR WARNING An improperly adjusted hitch system may reduce handling stability and braking perfor mance and could result in an accident Con sult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable trailer caravan dealer for addi tional information Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Breakaway Cable Attachment European braking regulations for braked trail ers up to 7 700 lbs 3 500 kg require trailers to be fitted with either a secondary coupling or breakaway cable The recommended location for attaching the normal trailers breakaway cable is in the stamped slot located on the sidewall of the hitch receiver With Attachment Point e For detachable tow bar pass the cable through the attachment point and clip it back onto itself 818e675b Detachable Ball Clip Loop Method 181 For fixed ball tow bar attach the clip directly Without Attachment Points For fixed ball tow bar loop the cable around to the designated point This alternative must the neck of the tow ball If you fit the cable be specifically permitted by the trailer manu like this use a single loop only facturer since the clip may not be sufficiently strong for use in the way e For detachable ball tow bar you must follow the recommended manufacturer or supplier procedure
97. 6 066 262 FINLAND Chrysler FinlandOy Ristipellontie 5 00390 HELSINKI Tel 020 54771 Fax 020 5477 485 FRANCE Chrysler France Parc de Rocquencourt BP100 F 78153 Le Chesnay Cedex Tel 33 1 39 23 56 00 Fax 33 1 39 23 57 92 GERMANY Chrysler Deutschland GmbH Englische StraBe 30 D 10587 Berlin Telefon 49 0 30 2690 0 Telefax 49 0 30 2690 3999 GRAND DUCHY OF LUXEMBOURG NT MAILFAS C O Chrysler Belgium Luxembourg BRU BRU 37850 Antwoord Nummer 193032 1930 Zaventem Belgium Tel 0800 6661 Fax 32 02 717 33 GREECE Chrysler Jeep Dodge Hellas 240 242 Kifisias Avenue 15231 Halandri Athens Greece Tel 30 210 6700800 Fax 30 210 6700820 GUATEMALA Grupo Q del Guatemala Edificio Grupo Q calle Mariscal Cruz 9 04 Zona 4 Ciudad de Guatemala Guatemala Tel 502 6685 9500 HONDURAS Grupo Q de Honduras Blvd Centro Am rica frente a Plaza Miraflores Tegucigalpa Honduras Tel 504 235 9220 Fax 504 232 6564 HUNGARY Chrysler Automotive Hungaria Kft H 1133 Budapest K rp t u 21 Tel 36 1 887 7000 Fax 36 1 887 7098 IRELAND C J IRELAND CONCESSIONAIRES LIMITED Clonlara Avenue Baldonnell Business Park Baldonnell Dublin 22 Ireland Tel 1890 946866 ITALY Chrysler Italia S r l Via Giulio Vincenzo Bona 110 00156 Roma Tel 06 41442812 Fax 06 418823114 E mail talktoGchrysler com LATVIA TC MOTORS LTD 40 Krasta Str LV 1003 Riga Tel 07 812 312 FA
98. 8 241 613 2400 Fax 58 241 613 2538 Fax 58 241 6132602 58 241 6132438 PO BOX 1960 Services And Parts Zona Industrial 11 Av Norte Sur 5 C C Calle Este Oeste C C LD Center Local B 2 Valencia Estado Carabobo Telf 58 241 6132757 58 241 6132773 Fax 58 241 6132743 265 CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP NOTIFICATION MODEL REGISTRATION OR LICENSE NUMBER A opor qp od op or tj NEW OWNER S NAME NEW OWNER S ADDRESS IF RESOLD BY CHRYSLER JEEP DEALERSHIP TELEPHONE NO ENTER DEALER STAMP IN BOX ABOVE FIRST OWNER 80140712 266 CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP NOTIFICATION MODEL REGISTRATION OR LICENSE NUMBER A opor qp od op or tj NEW OWNER S NAME NEW OWNER S ADDRESS IF RESOLD BY CHRYSLER JEEP DEALERSHIP TELEPHONE NO ENTER DEALER STAMP IN BOX ABOVE SECOND OWNER 80140753 267 268 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 157 Adding Fuel se mue 179 Additives Fuel 178 Adjustable Pedals 88 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 208 Air Conditioner Maintenance 208 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 209 xu iur me eR 208 Air Pressure Tires 167 Airbag ae sut 27 31 Airbag Deployment 32 Airbag Light 27 31 33 42 1
99. 81866760 81806762 Fixed Ball Neck Loop Method 818e675d Detachable Ball Neck Loop Method Fixed Ball Clip Loop Method 182 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt with Trailer Brake Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt without Trailer Brake Tongue Wt See Note 3 7L Gasoline 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg 1 653 Ibs 750 kg 309 Ibs 140 kg 5 7L Gasoline 7 716 lbs 3 500 kg 1 653 Ibs 750 kg 309 Ibs 140 kg 3 0L Diesel 7 716 lbs 3 500 kg 1 653 lbs 750 kg 309 Ibs 140 kg Maximum trailer towing speed is limited to 62 m ph 100 km h unless local laws require a lower speed NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be consid ered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never ex ceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tires General Information in this section Trailer and Tongue Weight Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch Consider the following items when computing the
100. 9 Fluid Check 215 Master Cylinder 215 Parking 25525542 em em 156 Warning Light 112 Brake Transmission Interlock 144 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 40 Bulb Replacement 226 BulbS LIGNE ar 2 4 4 kon lada 42 Calibration Compass 122 Camera Rear 95 Capacities Fluid 230 Caps Filler gU aid Sued a BE eS he es 179 Power Steering 155 Radiator Coolant Pressure 213 Washes 219 Carbon Monoxide Warning 41 Cargo Area Cover 100 Cargo Area Features 100 Cargo Compartment 100 ae 100 Luggage Carrier 103 Cargo LINE cbe ioi 100 Cargo Load Floor 102 Cargo Tie Downs 101 Cellular Phone 51 130 Center High Mounted Stop Light 229 Chains Tire s xci Geni 167 Changing A Flat Tire 193 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 41 Checks Safety 41 Child Restraint 35 38 39 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 37 38 Child Safety Locks 19 Clean Air Gasoline 178 Climate Control 131 Cold Weather Operation 141 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 130 COMPASS s ualde mue 121 Compass Calibration 122 Compass Variance
101. 96 96 97 97 97 97 97 98 98 98 98 98 47 48 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 1 Automatic Dimming Mirror 030406002 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during clean ing never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror The mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts
102. A Categories For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the require ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manu facturer only rec ommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Selection ACEA Categories For countries that use the ACEA European Oi Categories for Service Fill Oils use engine oils hat meet the requirements of ACEA C3 and that are approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 Engine Oil Viscosity 3 7L and 5 7L Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil im proves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom mended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in this section NOTE SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oil Diesel Engine Engine Oil Selection For best performance a
103. C R S 20 20 Amp Front Control 30 10 Amp Occupant Re Yellow Module FCM Red straint Controller Batt 43 ORC R O VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may e Remove fuse 27 in the Intelligent Power Module labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD 1 e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure ad equate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the System is started again 225 REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Lights Bulb Type Glove Box Lamp 194 Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976 Rear Cargo Lamp 214 2 Visor Vanity Lamp V26377 Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906 Instrument Cluster General 103 Telltale Hazard Lamp 74 Exterior Lights Bulb Type Backup Lamps 3157K Front Park Turn Lamp 3757A Front Fog Lamps 9145 Front Side Marker W5W Headlamps Low Beam High Intensity Discharge HID 015 Serviced at Authorized Dealer Headlamps Low Beam
104. Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 245 T This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic 246 Maintenance Schedule Diesel Engine To help you have the best driving experience possible the manufacturer has identified the Specific vehicle maintenance service intervals that are required to keep your vehicle operating properly and safely The manufacturer recommends that these maintenance intervals be performed at your selling dealer The technicians at your dealer ship know your vehicle best and have access to factory trained information genuine MO PARS parts and specially designed electronic and mechanical tools that can help prevent future costly repairs The maintenance intervals shown should be performed as indicated in this section NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 12 500 miles 20 000 km or 12 months whichever comes first At Each Stop for Fuel Check the engine oil level about 15 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
105. ERS 5 is the same as normal 4th gear Another tap to the left will shift the transmission down to ERS 4 direct gear WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid Screen 1 2 3 4 5 Display Actual 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 5 Gear s Allowed Applies to vehicles equipped with 5 7L engine only NOTE To select the proper gear position for maxi mum deceleration engine braking move the shift lever to the left D and hold it there The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an elec tronically controlled Overdrive 5th gear for 3 7L and 3 0L diesel engine 4th and 5th gears for 5 7L engine The transmission will auto matically shift to Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE e the engine coolant has reached normal op erating temperature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL switch has not been acti vated e transmission has reached normal operating temperature NOTE e If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for opera tion at this temperature Normal ope
106. ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible ESP BAS WARNING If a warning light remains on the system may not be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or BAS Under certain driving conditions where ESP or BAS would be ben eficial you if you have not adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to account for the lack of the feature may be in accident 28 Position Light Indicator This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on 200 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC features a driver interactive display and is located in the instrument cluster Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The EVIC consists of the following System Status Vehicle Information Warning Message Dis plays Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Compass Display Outside Temperature Display Trip Computer Functions The system allows the driver to select informa tion by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel MENU Button Press and release the MENU but E ton and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions MENU Personal Settings and System Status FUNCTION SELECT Button Press
107. Electronic Brake Control System 158 Anti Lock Brake System 159 Brake Assist System 159 Electronic Roll Mitigation 160 Electronic Stability Program 160 Traction Control System 159 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 160 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 89 Electronic Stability Program ESP 160 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 141 Engine xe ig dex 206 x usse uA ROT SNR 115 Temperature Gauge 114 Power Steering 155 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Engine Oil Viscosity 206 207 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 231 EVIG s moon aeter 115 117 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 206 207 Fog Light Service 228 Emergency In Case of Enhanced Accident Response Feature 32 Fog Lights 82 116 228 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 149 Entry System Illuminated 15 Fog Lights Rear s seb 82 Hazard Warning Flasher 192 Ethanol 177 Folding Rear Seat 76 JACKING iu xs BA dm tes 193 Exhaust Gas Caution 41 210 Four Wheel Drive 149 Jump Starting 197 Exhaust System 41 210 Operation 149 Engine Exterior Finish Care 219 SYSTEMS 2 2 45 Be Gb RR annee 149 Air Cleaner 208 Exterior Lights zer asus 42 Four Whee
108. Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds 13 If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of secu rity protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and
109. G Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent They can be unstable under certain conditions and hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water To prevent fuel system trouble drain the accu mulated water from the fuel water separator using the provided fuel water separator drain If you buy good quality fuel and follow the cold weather advice above fuel conditioners should not be required in your vehicle If available in your area a high cetane premium diesel fuel may offer improved cold starting and warm up performance ADDING FUEL Locking Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The locking fuel cap is located on the left side ofthe vehicle If the fuel cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Fuel Filler Door 1 Turn off the engine 2 Insert the ignition key into the fuel cap and turn the key one quarter turn to the right then rotate the fuel cap to the left to remove 3 After removing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the gas cap sus pended away from the body and protects the vehicle s surface 4 Rotate the ignition key back to the left to remove 5 To replace the cap insert it into the filler neck and tighten to the right until at least three clicks are heard CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could
110. GTIPS E R 152 e When to Use 4WD LOW Range If Equipped 152 eiDrivingarhroughiWatera 152 e Driving in Snow Mud and Sand 153 E 153 Traction DOWN 154 e After Driving Off Road 154 POWER STEERING EE 155 Power Steering Fluid Check 155 MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS IF EQUIPPED 156 PARKING BRAKE e e 22 156 e ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM 157 e ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 158 e Anti Lock Brake System ABS 159 Traction Control System TCS 159 Brake Assist System BAS 159 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 160 Electronic Stability Program ESP e Trailer Sway Control TSC e Hill Start Assist HSA 4WD Models With NV245 Two Speed Transfer Case Only Hill Descent Control 4WD Models With NV245 Two Speed Transfer Case Only ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light e TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION e Tire Pressure e Tire Inflation Pressures e High Speed Operation Radial omire Spinnin sites oes
111. HICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the hood liftgate liftgate flipper glass vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will pre vent the vehicle from starting and provide the following audio and visual signals the horn will pulse the headlights will flash the park lights will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash To Set the Alarm Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door lock switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter After the last door is closed or if all doors are closed the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds During that time the Vehicle Security Light will flash If it does not illuminate the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is not arming Also if you open a door during the arming period the Vehicle Security arm will cancel the arming process If you ish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after osing the door you must repeat one of the reviously described arming sequences o Disarm the System ither press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position gt The driver s door key cylinder
112. Haul Indicator 115 Traction Control 165 Turn Signal 42 80 83 227 228 Vanity Mirror 4 24059 xe won xs 51 Voltage end aieo 116 Load Floor Cargo 102 LOCKS 554 mous Rue asp SES 18 Automatic Door 18 Child Protection 19 DOOF guia vina p Ged Bae Bis 18 Power Door 4 244 eR Rs 18 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren aures 37 38 Lubrication Body 209 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 103 Lumbar Support 72 aintenance Free Battery 208 aintenance Procedures 205 aintenance Schedule 234 246 alfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 113 emory Feature Memory Seat 77 Seat 51 77 emory Seats and Radio 77 ethanol 177 ethanolF el i 2e26 177 Mini Trip Computer 119 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 152 218 Park Sense System Rear 90 MIMOS gt stig neutre mers 49 Oil Change Indicator 119 Parking Brake 156 Automatic Dimming 49 Oil Change Indicator Reset 119 Passing Light s xe ocios ead he ea 83 Electric Powered 50 Oil ENGINE s ads 206 Pedals Adjustable 88 Electric Remote 50 Capacity Jis ache ees Ras 230 Personal Settings 124 Exterior Folding
113. K 4 Turn the ignition OFF 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack e Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change Continued WARNING Continued e f working on or near a roadway be ex tremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Jack Warning Label 1 Remove the spare tire jack and tools from storage 2 Loosen but do not rem
114. Name section e Automatic download and update if sup ported begins as soon as the phone Bluetooth wireless connection is made to the uconnect phone For example after you start the vehicle e Maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the uconnect phone e Depending on the maximum number of en tries downloaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if available previous downloaded phonebook is available for use e Only the phonebook of the currently con nected cellular phone is accessible e Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the cellular phonebook e This downloaded phonebook cannot be ed ited or deleted on the uconnect phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are transferred and updated to uconnect phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to ac cept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owners Manual for
115. PI Certified SAE 5W 20 engine oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade SAE 5W 30 engine oil ap proved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oil ACEA Categories 3 7L and 5 7L Engines For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils use engine oils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3 and approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oil 3 0L Diesel Engine Use SAE 5W 30 Synthetic Low Ash Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 11106 and approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 and ACEA C3 Engine Oil Filter 3 7 and 5 7L Engine MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Engine Oil Filter 3 0L Diesel Engine MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 7L Engine ZFR6F 11G Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm 231 Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Fuel Selection 3 7L Engine 91 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 91 Octane Acceptable 95 Octane Recommended Fuel Selection 3 0L Diesel Engine Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle The manufacturer requires tha
116. RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 lbs 68 kg and should be uniformly dis tributed over the luggage rack crossbars NOTE If not equipped with crossbars your autho rized dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity 103 The optional crossbars must be installed using the correct orientation the longer crossbar toward the front The optional crossbars must also be secured in one of the seven detent positions marked with an arrow on the siderails to prevent movement To move the crossbars loosen the thumb Screws located at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately eight turns then move the crossbar to the desired position keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame Once the crossbar is in one of the seven detent positions retighten the thumb screws to lock the crossbar into position NOTE To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in use place the front crossbar in the second detent from the front of the vehicle and the rear crossbar in the last detent clos
117. Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Tt J Rotate tires Inspect the CV joints 1 Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 120 000 Miles 192 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tT Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s Change the transfer case fluid Replace the accessory drive belt s Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 243 127 500 Miles 204 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Tt J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 135 000 Miles 216 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change th
118. Shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle upward until fully engaged 87 WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driv ing Adjusting the steering column while driv ing or driving with the steering column un locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED This feature allows both the brake and accel erator pedals to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The adjustable pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position The position of the brake and accelerator ped als can be adjusted without compromising safety or comfort in actuating the pedals 88 Adjustable Pedal Switch Press the bottom of the switch to move the pedals forward away from the driver Press the top of the switch to move the pedals rearward toward the driver The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF e The pedals can be adjusted while driving e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE R or when the Elec tronic Speed Control is on A message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehi
119. TO position This button can be used to block out smoke odors dust high hu midity or if rapid cooling is de sired The Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The button includes an LED that illuminates indicating that the Recirculation mode is active You may use this feature sepa rately NOTE Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the win dows begins to fog press the Recirculation icon button to return to outside air Some temperature humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on win dows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in the defrost or defrost floor modes Attempting to use recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the button to blink and then turn off Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality q antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine over heating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recom mended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging NOTE Refer to the Operating Tips chart for Manual A C Control in this section f
120. X 07 812 313 LITHUANIA Silberauto AS Laisves av 125 A LT 2022 VILNIUS Tel 02 301037 Fax 02 301036 NETHERLANDS Chrysler Nederland B V Postbus 2088 NL 3500 GB Utrecht Tel 31 0 30 247 19 11 Fax 31 0 30 247 16 00 NEW ZEALAND Chrysler New Zealand Private Bag 14907 Panmure New Zealand Tel 09573 7800 Fax 09573 7808 NORWAY Chrysler Norge A S Solheimveien 7 N 1471 L renskog Tel 47 67 92 60 00 Fax 47 67 90 53 10 PANAMA Grupo Q de Panam Calle 50 Final Edificio 68 San Francisco Panam Panam Tel 507 303 1100 Fax 507 303 0980 PARAGUAY Cencar S A Avda Mariscal Lopez No 5700 Asuncion Paraguay Tel 59521515911 Fax 59521515924 263 PERU Divemotor S A Calle Alejandro Bussalleu 151 Urb Sta Cat alina La Victoria Lima Peru Tel 51 1 712 2000 Fax 51 1 712 2002 POLAND Chrysler Polska Sp z o o ul Gotlieba Daimlera 1 02 480 Warszawa Tel 801 330 300 PORTUGAL Chrysler Portugal S A Qta da Fonte Edif D Am lia Rua Victor C mara 2 19A 2770 229 Pago de Arcos Portugal Tel 351 0 21 323 91 00 Fax 4351 0 21 323 91 99 264 PUERTO RICO AND U S VIRGIN ISLANDS Chrysler International Services S A P O Box 191857 San Juan 009191857 Tel 7877825757 Fax 7877823345 ROMANIA S C Auto Rom S R L Bucuresti Bd Expozitiei nr 2 RO 78334 Tel 01 2240020 25 Fax 01 2241638 RUSSIA Chrysler RUS SAO 39A Leningradsky
121. accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser voir brake master cylinder and power steer ing and add as needed Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Inspect for the presence of water in the fue filter water separator unit CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the ollowing pages for the required maintenance intervals 6 250 Miles 10 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 247 12 500 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the eng
122. aches approxi a mately 8 7 Liters 2 3 U S Gallons this light will come on and remain on until fuel is added The Low Fuel Warning Light may turn on and off again especially during and after hard braking accelerations or turns This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank Also a single chime will sound 13 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper imits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the ve hicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your ve hicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Coo
123. ads 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Con nect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result e Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The result ing electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury Continued 197 WARNING Continued e During cold weather when temperatures are below the freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not at tempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode and cause per sonal injury Battery temperature must be brought above freezing point before at tempting a jump start 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged bat tery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine 6 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few min utes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan 198 WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in e Personal injury cause
124. age the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stub born soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a eather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning pur poses Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respi ratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are ighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive mate rial to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use cau tion when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defroste
125. alves Yellow Green 40 25 Amp Next Generation 29 20 Amp POM Batt Natural Controller NGC Yellow Gasoline Only Injectors cx _ 59 pare 4i 2 Integrated Power Module 32 15 Amp Powertrain 42 Spare Car m Blue Control Module 43 25 Amp Coils Actuators Cav tridge Mini Description Diesel Only Natural ity Fuse Fuse 33 20 Amp Final Drive 44 Spare 8 10 Amp Lt Park Lamps Yellow Control Module Red FDCM E Diff 9 10 Amp Trailer Tow Park 34 Spare Red Lamps 35 20 Amp Trail Tow Mod 10 10 Amp Rt Park Lamps Yellow Export Only Red 36 Spare 224 Car Car E Cav Mini Cav Mini c ity pug Fuse Description ity Tue Fuse Description 12 20 Amp Front Control 21 20 Amp Rt Trailer Tow Yellow Module FCM Yellow Stop Turn Batt 4 22 30 Amp Final Drive 13 20 Amp Front Control Pink Control Module Yellow Module FCM FDCM MOD Batt 2 23 50 Radiator Fan 14 20 Amp Adjustable Pedal Red Yellow 27 15 Amp Ignition Off Draw 15 20 Amp Ft Fog Lamps Blue IOD 1 Yellow Intrusion Module 16 20 Amp Horn Satellite Video Yellow Steering Control 17 20 Amp Rear Fog Lamps Module Yellow Export Only 28 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw 18 20 Amp Front Control Yellow IOD 2 Yellow Module FCM Radio Batt 1 29 10 Amp Occupant Re 19 20 Amp Lt Trailer Tow Red straint Controller Yellow Stop Turn OR
126. ar it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the uconnect phone you will stil be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the uconnect phone e Press the button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the uconnect phone e Press the 6 button Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The uconnect phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your uconnect phone paired cellular phone to the uconnect phone or vice versa press the S button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a uconnect phone paired cellular phone and the uconnect phone follow the instructions de scribed in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired C
127. ar phone the uconnect phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the 9 button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the 9 button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The uconnect phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only an swer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the Te button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phone book entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the
128. ase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 of this manual Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers If Equipped When YES Y is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears When NO N is selected the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper op eration Service Interval Diesel Models If Equipped When this feature is selected a service interval between 2 500 to 12 500 miles 4 000 to 20 000 km in 625 mile 1 000 km increments may be selected To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to select distances between 2 500 to 12 500 miles 4 000 to 20 000 km in 625 mile 1 000 km increments Reset Service Distance Displays Only if Service Interval was Changed When this feature is selected the current ac cumulated service distance can be reset to the newly selected service interval Press and re lease the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your Selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N ap pears NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall M
129. at belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h NOTE BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Airbags This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the
130. ate Only 2nd gear 3 7L and 3 0L diesel engine or 3rd gear 5 7L engine will be available in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your autho rized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmis Sion on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at a cali brated speed at light throttle It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops below a cali brated speed or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages The feature is operational in Overdrive and in DRIVE NOTE The torque converter clutch will not en gage until the transmission fluid and en gine coolant are warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 1 6 to 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Manually shifting using the ERS shift control between 4 direct gear and 5 D Overdrive gear positions will dem onstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive For ve hicles with 5 7L engine which have two Overdrive gears the transmission may not shift into the top Overdrive gear nor mal 5th g
131. ate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is respon sible for braking the vehicle Towing with HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer 164 WARNING e Ifyou use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming accel eration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSAis not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the trans mission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll down the hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember to use the park ing brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Fea tures in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Hill Descent Cont
132. ate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The ABS conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal The ABS pump motor runs during the self test at 12 mph 20 km h and during an ABS stop The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will dimin ish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping dis tance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued 157 WARNING Continued The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns following
133. ator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up Normal Starting Diesel Engines Observe the following when the engine is op erating All message center lights are off e Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is off 142 Low Oil Pressure Light is off Cold Weather Precautions Operation in ambient temperature below 32 F 0 C may require special considerations The following chart suggests these options A No 2 Ultra Low TC Sulfur Diesel Fuel __ 18 6 No 2 Ultra Low Sulfur 23 C ao Climatized Diesel Fuel __ 29 C 9 mere 81949058 No 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel No 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel ULSD should only be used where extended arctic conditions 10 F 23 C exist NOTE e Use of Climatized ULSD Diesel Fuel or Number 1 ULSD Diesel Fuel results in a noticeable decrease in fuel economy Climatized ULSD Diesel Fuel is a blend of Number 2 ULSD a
134. ature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that are recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety Systems including the airbag system Vehicle speed Engine RPM Brake switch status Pedal position And other parameters depending on vehicle configuration Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Seating Position Front Rear Mass Group Passen Out board 0 Up to 10 kg X U U 0 9 months 0 Up to X U U 13 kg 0 2 years 1 9 to 18 kg X U U 9 months 4 years Il amp Ill 15 to X U U 36 kg 4 12 years Key of letters used in the table above U Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this age weight group UF Suitable for forward facing universal category restraints approved for use in this age weight group L
135. ause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to wipe frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc 209 NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de pending on geographical area and fre quency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks wa ter lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any de bris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the low washer fluid level will be indicated When the sensor detects a low fluid level the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the WASHER FLUID LOW message will be displayed The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will 210 help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold w
136. automatically returns to the detented ON position Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON 4 START Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking To remove the emergency key slide the me chanical latch at the top of the Key Fob side ways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020207762 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Removing Key Fob From Ignition Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the key to the LOCK position and then remove the Key Fob NOTE For vehicles not equipped with the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 6
137. b 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and re place the bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Front Turn Signal 1 Open the hood 2 Turn the turn signal bulb one quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing 073305864 1 High Beam Bulb 2 Low Beam Bulb 3 Turn Signal Bulb 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and re place the bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 227 Front Fog Lamps 1 Reach behind the front fascia from under the vehicle 2 Turn the front fog lamp bulb one quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and re place bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 228 Side Repeater Lamp 1 Push the side repeater lamp to the left and then disengage it by rotating it out of the metal around its left edge Remove the side repeater lamp Rotate the socket out Remove the bulb ak
138. beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is Speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions Even though the system is designed for users speaking in European English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish accents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated sys tem such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended Itis not recommended to store similar sound ing names in the uconnect phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and uconnect phone Local name recognition rate is opti mized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for O zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system perfor mance may be compromised with the con vertible top down 63 Phone Far End Audio Perfor
139. ble Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030609126 66 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Phonebook Entries Listed one Enter Name at a time 1st Confirmation Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Enter Number Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added 81c6bf80 Voice Tree Setup Setup Service Toggle Par List Phones New phone Select a language Confirmation will temporarily Prompts on off Say 4 digit override pin code Phones 5 elect phone 222264 to be deleted List Phones priorities Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing Phone Deleted System System Lists confirms Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605582 67 Voice Commands Voice Commands Voice Commands 68 Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s zero download pager beeper one Dutch Nederlands pair a phone two edit phone pairing pairing three emergency phonebook phonebook four English previous five delete all erase all redial
140. ble operating modes in 4WD HIGH range and one operating mode 4WD LOW range High Range 4WD Models On This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD HIGH range Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to AWD HIGH range the ESP system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off or Full Off mode for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated other stability features of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily press the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation ESP OFF Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driv ing with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome tur
141. cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to pro tect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights come on when you open any door or use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock any door They will remain on for approximately 30 seconds after all doors are closed then fade to off The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition after you close all the doors REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or liftgate from distances up to approxi mately 30 ft 9 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not n
142. cause airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed 31 NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Additional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag de ployment if the communication network re mains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off 32 e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to deflate im mediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean some thing is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon ai
143. cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will still dis play In this situation the TIRE LOW PRES SURE message will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recom mended cold tire pressure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Unde sirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equip ment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result e After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres sure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could dam age the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor 171 NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace nor mal tire care and maintenance or to pro vide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping abi
144. ced as well Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steer ing wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued WARNING Continued Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat at tachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer ap proved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag System for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags o ready to inflate for your protection t in a collision W
145. ch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thin ner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a par ticular disc it may be damaged ie scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condi tion may be lessened or eliminated by relocat ing the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio perfor mance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recom mended that the radio volume be tu
146. change is performed by someone other than your autho rized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser voir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission 5 7L only and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Severe Duty Conditions t Change the engine oil and engine oil filter at every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months if using your vehicle under any of the following severe duty conditions e Stop and go driving e Driving in dusty conditions Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service c
147. cle Infor mation Center EVIC if the pedals are at tempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Set or Adjustable Peda Disabled Shifter In Reverse Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 for more information CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedal s or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path WARNING Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h for 3 7L and 5 7L engines and 14 mph 23 km h for 3 0L diesel engines The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel CRUISE Y SET DECEL 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated simulta neously If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by push ing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting
148. cle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise and remove the jack and wheel blocks 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased lever age Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut tight ness is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Lower the jack to its fully closed position WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper locations NOTE A tire should be stowed with the beauty side up Storing the tire upside down may result in scratching or damage to the wheel face Continue winching up the tire until you hear the winch ratchet three times Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the underbody of the vehicle Damage to the winch cable may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose WARNING Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down Impact type tools may damage the winch mechanism 12 Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo area JUMP STARTING If the veh
149. cle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap 2 Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Latch Plate to Buckle WARNING e Abeltthat is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you e A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly e A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the in Side surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision WARNING Continued A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you fr
150. cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the fuel filter water separator unit Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the CV joints Inspect the transfer case fluid Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 56 250 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Rotate tires Replace engine air cleaner filter 1 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 251 62 500 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Q If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequ
151. common connection with both pins 5 and 7 186 Left Rear Position Side Marker Lights and Rear Regis tration Plate Illumination Device Black Reverse lights Red Black Permanent Power Supply 12V Brown White Pin Function Wire Color Number 1 Left Turn Signal Yellow 2 Rear Fog Light Blue 97 Ground White Common Return for Contacts Pins 1 and 2 and 4 to 8 4 Right Turn Green Signal Power Supply Controlled by Ignition Switch 12V Red Pin Function Wire Color Number 11 Return for Con White tact Pin 10 12 Reserve for Fu Red Blue ture Allocation 13 Return for Con White tact Pin 9 Note The allocation pin 12 has been changed from Coding for coupled Trailer to Reserve for Future Allocation The three return circuits shall not be con nected electrically in the trailer The rear position registration plate illumina tion device shall be connected such that no light of the device has a common connection with both pins 5 and 7 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when tow ing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range select TOW HAUL mode if equipped or a lower gear range NOTE Using the TOW HAUL mode if e
152. controls Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motor ists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flasher will con tinue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may run down your battery 192 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped shift the transmission to NEUTRAL but do not in crease the engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could dam age your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending
153. crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation the elec tronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the pos 34 sible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initi ated by Chrysler Group LLC such investiga tions may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations n the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initia tive the company or its designated represen tative will first obtain permission of the appro priate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash data bases such as those maintained by the gov ernment officials and various states Data of a potentially sensitive n
154. d Diesel Only 2 40 Amp HID Headlamps Green 3 50 Amp PTC Heater 2 Red Diesel Only 4 30 Amp Power Outlets Pink Car M Car Mini Cav T ity tridge Fuse Description ity tridge Fuse Description Fuse Fuse 5 50 Amp PTC Heater 3 16 50 Amp ASD Red Diesel Only Red 6 30 Amp Cig Lighter Trail 17 30 Amp ABS Pump Pink Tow Batt Pink 7 40 Amp Power Liftgate 18 40 Amp Accessory Delay Green Commander Green Seats Only 19 40 Amp JB Power 8 40 Amp Starter JB Power Green Green 20 30 Amp Wiper Motor 9 20 Amp Front Power Pink Blue Windows 21 20 Amp Fuel Pump 10 Spare Yellow 11 40 Amp HVAC Blower 22 20 Amp A C Clutch Green Yellow 12 30 Amp Rear Wiper Ign 23 25 Amp Power Inverter Pink R O Natural 13 40 Amp Rear Window 24 20 Amp Rear Heated Green Defroster EBL Yellow Seats Heated Mirror 25 20 Amp Final Drive 14 30 Amp Rear HVAC Yellow Control Module Pink If Equipped FDCM 15 Spare 223 Car m Car um Underhood Fuses Integrated Power Cav trid Mini D ipti Cav trid Mini D ipti Module ity ge Fuse escription ity ridge Fuse escription use Fuse 26 15 Amp Brake Lamps 37 20 Amp Ignition Switch Blue Yellow 27 20 Amp HD Washer 38 20 Amp HID Left Yellow If Equipped Yellow Export Only 39 20 Amp HID Right 28 30 Amp ABS V
155. d can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your Selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears System Status Press and release the MENU button until one of the following System Status messages displays in the EVIC System OK e System Warnings Displayed will display all currently active System Warnings e Tire Pressure Monitor System shows the current pressure of all four road tires For additional information refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in Section 5 of this manual 126 TIRE 3m dw Y Tire Pressure Display NOTE e Tires heat up during normal driving con ditions Heat will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi 14 to 41 kPa during normal driving conditions Refer to Tire Inflation Pressures in Section 5 for additional information e Your system can be set to display pres sure units in PSI kPa or BAR SOUND SYSTEMS Refer to your Sound Systems Booklet UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with uconnect For sales code RER RBZ REN REP REW RB2 or REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN RBZ RB2 or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows you to plug an iPod into the vehicle s sound system thro
156. d suggest that the indicator bulb is defective Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to Switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your head lights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is re leased Headlight Off Delay There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle lights for O 30 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF To activate the headlight delay the multifunction lever must be rotated to the Off position after the ignition Switch is turned OFF Only the headlights will illuminate during this time Refer to Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 to turn this feature On Off or to set the time interval Interior Lights The interior lighting consists of courtesy lights mounted below the instrument panel an over head console light assembly which contains both driver and passenger reading lights read ing lights located above the rear doors and a rear cargo light Opening a door pressing the UNLOCK button on t
157. d a vehicle rollover occur the pre tensioners and or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are cali brated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occupant protec tion WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any ob structions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely af fected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Along with seat belts and pretensioners Ad vanced Front Airbags work with the knee bol sters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant pro tection Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position everyone for the best interaction with the Advanced Front airbag Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag Children 12 years old and younger should al
158. d by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion CAUTION Any procedure other than above could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or of the immobilized vehicle TOW EYES Your vehicle is equipped with tow eyes which are mounted in the front and the rear CAUTION Tow eyes are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow eyes for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle Tow straps are recommended when towing the WARNING Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes Tow straps and chains may break caus ing serious injury TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Four Wheel Models Only The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed or with all four wheels ON the ground the transfer case in NEUTRAL and the trans mission in PARK Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 for further information CAUTION Towing this vehicle using any other method could result in extensive damage to the trans fer case and or transmission Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited War ranty vehicle chains may cause vehicle damage 200 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 Battery 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 Power
159. d fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The System is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect 156 PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever com pletely Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE When the parking brake is applied vehicle speed is detected the light will flash and a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempt ing to move the vehicle This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an auto matic transmission apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK othe
160. d the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The uconnect phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All uconnect Phonebook Names e Press the to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The uconnect phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phonebook entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the button during the playing of the desired fame and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point The uconnect phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the uconnect phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the uconnect phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellul
161. debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vi brations could affect the performance of ParkSense e When you turn ParkSense off the instru ment cluster will display PARK ASSIST DISABLED Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key 94 When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle and the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST DIS ABLED ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone If a ParkSense system malfunction oc curs a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will dis play SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM and the LED in the ParkSense switch will illuminate If this occurs see your autho rized dealer for service Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The system might not detect an obstacle near the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indica tion that an obstacle is present e Objects must not be within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do s
162. dified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual 29 WARNING Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag de ployment could cause serious injury in cluding death Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a regulated safety system required for this vehicle 30 The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors sig nals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC airbags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on sever ity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to pro vide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions de
163. dren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now available However because the lower 37 anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attach ments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat ing LATCH compa
164. e engine compartment This is normally a re sult of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will Soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recov ery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze addi tions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concen tration at 50 HOAT engine coolant anti freeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or ob structed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever nec essary install ONLY the correct type thermo stat
165. e Chains CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Because of restricted chain clearance be tween tires and other suspension compo nents it is important that only chains in good condition are used Broken chains can cause serious damage Stop the ve hicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the dam aged parts of the chain before further use Continued 167 CAUTION Continued e Install chains on rear tires only observing the tire chain manufacturers instructions on the method of installation and conditions for use e For vehicles outfitted with 17 wheels do not install tire chains or traction devices on tires larger than 235 65R17 e For vehicles outfitted with 18 wheels do not install tire chains or traction devices on tires larger than 235 60R18 Tires larger than this may not provide sufficient body clearance with chains or other traction de vices e Use SAE class S tire chains or traction devices only e Install chains snugly and tighten after 1 2 mile 0 8 km of driving Continued 168 CAUTION Continued e Do not exceed 30 mph 50 km h unless otherwise specified by the chain manufac turer Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacturer Drive cautiously avoiding large bumps potholes and extreme
166. e and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunc tion use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure 205 Engine Oil Gasoline Engines Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on leve ground will improve the accuracy of the oil leve readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE leve range Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95L of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE range wil result in the level being at the top of the SAFE range CAUTION Overiilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals 206 NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months whichever comes first Engine Oil Selection Non ACE
167. e belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive Emergency Locking mode Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The driver and front passenger seat belts may be equipped with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision This device improves the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu pant Restraint Controller ORC Like the air bags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision deploys the airbags and or pretensioners a deployed airbag and or pre tensioner must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the se
168. e engine oil and engine oil filter tT Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 244 142 500 Miles 228 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Tt J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 150 000 Miles 240 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a O O O D Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tT Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the transfer case fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order
169. e fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating tempera ture The fluid level is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait a minimum of 217 two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tempera ture If the fluid level is correctly estab lished at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release parking brake To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing 218 fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position
170. e instrument panel provides both audio and visual warnings to indicate the distance between the front fascia and the detected obstacle ONO 032806729 Front ParkSense LED Display When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for about one second Each side of the warning display has six yellow and two red LEDs The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the red LED is ON The system illuminates the two outer most yellow LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles When the obstacle is detected at a distance of about 59 in 150 cm from the front fascia bumper some of the LEDs of the warning display will be ON As the distance of the detected obstacle to the front fascia oumper decreases more LEDs are illuminated When the warning display has the first red LEDs ON the warning display will actuate an intermittent tone for about 10 seconds The radio will be muted while the tone is actuated When the detected obstacle is about 11 8 in 30 cm from the front fascia bumper the warn ing display will actuate a continuous tone for about 10 seconds and it will turn ON all LEDs including both red LEDs on the corresponding side of the display The radio will be muted while the tone is actuated Enable Disable ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with a switch located in the switch bank of the instrument panel When the switch is pressed to dis
171. e it lists options press the 4 button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the me button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Can cel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active applica tion For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the e button and say Help or Main Menu 69 Commands The Voice Recognition VR system under stands two types of commands Universal com mands are available at all times Local com mands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the 6 button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a co
172. e lever on the open edge of the door it cannot be opened from the inside of the ve hicle Push the lever down to disengage the Child Protection Door Locks WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection Door Locks are engaged Child Protection Door Lock WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the front passenger door rear doors which operates the front passenger rear passenger door windows The window controls will oper ate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position Power Window Switches The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window Switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch 19 To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the win dow to stop The power window switches remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feat
173. e of the uconnect phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the uconnect phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Compatible Phones The phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 1 0 or higher See uconnect website for supported phones www chrysler com uconnect www dodge com uconnect www jeep com uconnect To find the list of compatible phones navigate through the following menus e Select model year for the vehicle e Select type of the vehicle e Mark the box if radio is equipped with Navi gation e n the getting started tab select compatible phones Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect phone and to navigate through the uconnect phone menu structure Voice com mands are required after most uconnect phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound com mands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing For each feature explanation in
174. e retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint For additional information re fer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tight ening the lap shoulder belt on the child re straint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you Still cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you When your child restraint is not in use se cure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal in jury Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the
175. ear until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm If the vehicle has not been driven in sev eral days the first few seconds of opera tion after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This con dition is normal and will not cause dam age to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear position Rocking the Vehicle If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the shift lever between DRIVE and REVERSE while applying slight pressure to the accelerator NOTE The Electronic Stability Program ESP and Traction Control System TCS if equipped should be turned OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Section 3 of this manual The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effec tive Racing the engine or spinning the wheels due to the frustration of not freeing the vehicle may lead to transmission overheating and fail ure Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts
176. ear limiting mode and shift to the appropriate gear The display will read D 3 7L and 3 0L Diesel Engine When in the DRIVE position the first tap to the left will shift down one gear and will display that gear For example if you are in DRIVE and are in 5th gear when you tap the shift lever one time to the left the transmission will down shift to 4th gear and the display will show 4 Another tap to the left will shift the transmis Sion into 3rd gear 5 7L Engine On vehicles equipped with 5 7L engines use of ERS or TOW HAUL mode also enables an additional underdrive gear which is not nor mally used during through gear accelerations This additional gear improves vehicle perfor mance and cooling capability when towing a trailer on certain grades ERS 1 2 and 3 are underdrive gears ERS 4 is direct drive ERS 5 Overdrive is the same as the normal 4th gear When in the DRIVE position in 1st through 4th gear the first tap to the left will display the ERS designation for the current gear the trans mission will not downshift For example if you are in DRIVE and are in 3rd direct gear when you tap the shift lever one time to the left the display will show 4 ERS 4 is direct gear Another tap to the left will shift the transmis sion down to ERS 3 the added underdrive gear When in the DRIVE position in 5th gear the first tap to the left will downshift the transmission and display 5
177. eather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your cli mate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly main tained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the under side or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or misposi tioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you uncon Scious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will de stroy the effectivene
178. ecommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its perfor mance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued WARNING Continued To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed con tainer Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sud den brake failure This could result in a accident e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Do not allow petroleum based fluid to con taminate the brake fluid Brake seal com ponents could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident 215 Front Rear Axle Fluid Front Axle Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be to the bottom of the oil fill hole Rear Axle Fluid Level Check Lubr
179. ed Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION DO NOT place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Four Way Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped The front passenger s power seat switches are ocated on the outboard side of the passen ger s seat The bottom switch controls forward rearward adjustment The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment NOTE The four way seat does not have an up down adjustment WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION DO NOT place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path 73 Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event of a rear impact The head restraint should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear The head restraints have a locking button which must be pushed in to lower the head restraint to all positions The restraints may be rai
180. ed Commander Only 221 222 Car m Car Car dui 24 Mice ity Fuse Description ity Ll Fuse Description ity 2 Fuse Description 6 Spare 12 10 Amp Door Mods O H 20 10 Amp Steering Column B Red Lamps IP Cour Red Control Module 7 20 Amp Door Locks B tesy Lamps Glove SCCM Cluster Yellow Box Lamp B R S BUX Trailer 8 Spare 13 10 Amp Autowipe R A Tow B Red 21 Spare 9 20 Amp Pwr Outlet B 14 20 Amp Cigar Ltr R A Acc Yellow Yellow Delay 10 10 Amp Final Drive Control 15 10 Amp Tire Pressure Tran 22 15 Amp Rear Wiper B Red Module FDCM Red sponders R O Blue Heater Ventilation 16 10 Amp Upper amp Lower 24 10 Amp Power Distribution Air Conditioning Red Switch Bank Diag Red Center PDC Re HVAC Rear Connector Cluster lays Powertrain Heated Seat B Control Module Switch O H 17 15 Amp Flipper Glass B A580 R S Heater Ventilation Blue 25 10 Amp Shifter Assy BTSI Air Conditioning 19 Spare Red Trans Case HVAC Relay R S Switch ESP ABS Rear Park Assist Trailer Sway Damp 11 Spare Relay B Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center Car idee Description use 1 50 Amp PTC Heater 1 Re
181. ed to the vehicle s uconnect phone The uconnect phone al lows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the uconnect phone at a time The uconnect phone is available in English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish languages as equipped 51 WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the 0 microphone for the uconnect phone depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and the radio contains the two control buttons that will enable you to ac cess the uconnect phone Voice Recognition Button e Actual button location may vary with radio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The uconnect phone can be used with Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular 52 phones Some phones may not support all the uconnect phone features If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Head set Profile you may not be able to use any uconnect phone features Refer to your cel lular service provider or the phone manufac turer for details The uconnect phone is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volum
182. eed to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 15 NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter however the but tons on the remaining RKE transmitters will continue to work Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables all RKE trans mitter buttons for all RKE transmitters 020207435 Key Fob with RKE Transmitter To Unlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the un lock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on 16 Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e F
183. ellular Phone Names Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The uconnect phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To 61 select or delete a paired phone being announced press the t button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the phone e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the uconnect phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle 62 Delete phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the button at any
184. em Power Steering Fluid or equivalent which meets Chrysler Material Standard MS 10838 232 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engine The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched uled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Re quired will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary The oil change indicator message will illumi nate approximately 7 000 miles 11 200 km after the most recent oil change was per formed Have your vehicle serviced as soon as 234 possible within 500 miles 800 km However an earlier oil change at 3 000 miles 5 000 km may be required if the vehicle is operated under Severe Duty Conditions later in this section NOTE The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an ex tended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the sched uled oil change If this scheduled oil
185. emory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the remote key less entry transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Easy Entry Exit Seat under Driver Memory Seat in Section 3 of this manual for more information Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power win dow switches radio uconnect phone if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Hill Start Assist To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears 125 Display ECO If Equipped The ECO message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units of Measure In The EVIC odometer and uconnect gps if equippe
186. ene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authori ties to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals and children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open con tainers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek 213 emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing engine coolant anti freeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill 214 Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of th
187. ent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 68 750 Miles 110 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Rotate tires Q If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 252 75 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule OOOO C O C O O O O Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace engine air cleaner filter Replace the fuel filter water separator unit Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect exhaust system Inspect the CV joints Inspect the transfer case fluid Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 81 250 Miles 130 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Rotate tires Q If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessar
188. epeated overheating of the seat could dam age the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat 76 60 40 Split Rear Seat To Lower Rear Seat Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still main tain some rear seating room NOTE Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seatback to fold down easily 1 Pull the release strap toward the front of the vehicle to release Rear Seat Release NOTE Do not fold the rear seat down with the center seat belt buckled 2 Fold the rear seat completely forward Rear Seat Folded To Raise Rear Seat Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have diffi culty returning the seat to its proper position WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury e The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously in jured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint sys
189. eplace if necessary O O O C 54 Months Maintenance Service Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 75 000 Miles 120 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tT Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 105 000 miles 168 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 240 82 500 Miles 132 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 90 000 Miles 144 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a O O O O O O O Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tf Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with f
190. equently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or anything else builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens Turning ParkView On or Off With Navigation Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Press the camera setup soft key 4 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 5 Press the save soft key 96 6 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to check entire surround ings displayed across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear 7 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navi gation or audio screen appears again Turning ParkView On or Off Without Navigation Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 4 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to check entire surround ings displayed across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear 5 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears a
191. equirements 230 272 Saver Mode 120 Tank Capacity 230 BUSES rm 221 Gas Cap Fuel Filler 179 Gasoline Clean Air 178 Gasoline Fuel 176 Conserving 120 Gauges Coolant Temperature 114 su ee eda aba 115 Speedometer 112 Jachomet r 114 GearRanges 145 General Information 14 17 176 Glass Cleaning 221 Gross Axle Weight Rating 181 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 180 Hands Free Phone uconnect 51 Hazard Warning Flasher 192 Head Restraints 74 Head RESIS eo ee cA RE 74 Headlight Washers 87 Headlighis che 80 226 Bulb Replacement eec IR s 220 Leveling 84 On With Wipers 81 Replacing 227 Washers 87 Heated Mirrors 50 Heated Seats 74 75 High Beam Indicator 113 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer SWICK carros 4 a Boe a 83 Hill Descent Control 164 Hill Start Assist 163 Holder CUP i i Ree 100 Hood Release 2 80 LL ge p dez das 13 CQ 12 13 gnition Key Removal 13 lluminated Entry
192. er the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is necessary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Elec tronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is re quired Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approximately two sec onds The light should then turn off unless
193. es mum Latch Anchorages In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat Tether Strap Mounting Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attach ment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap First loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchor age bars pushing aside the seat cover mate rial Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant
194. es it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel po sition Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel po sition The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during accelera tion ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions WARNING ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from act ing on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road condi tions ESP cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skill ful driver can prevent accidents The capabili ties of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man ner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has three availa
195. est to the rear of the vehicle If the rear crossbar or any metallic ob ject is placed over the satellite radio antenna if equipped you may experi ence interruption of satellite radio recep 104 tion For improved satellite radio recep tion place the rear crossbar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle when not in use The grab handles on the back of the vehicle if equipped are not to be used as a towing feature CAUTION To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars installed The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars not directly on the roof If it is necessary to place the load on the roof place a blanket or some other protection between the load and the roof surface To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lbs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately CAUTION Continued e Long loads which extend over the wind shield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle e Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to a load This is especially true on large
196. estraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Except for the second row center seating position all passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch plates The second row center position has an automatic locking retractor Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion tigh around the child restraint so that it is no necessary to use a locking clip If the sea belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder bel will tighten the belt the cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat bel system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if neces sary For the second row center seat bel with the automatic locking retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it through the child re straint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into th
197. ete listing of all sub jects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual a 5 amp D e 7 of UO WER FAILURE OUTLET SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM e Cs a e T l ae i amp M D al e 1 2 D FUEL REAR TENT WPER E D nod ue HILL DESCENT BARING A US o PP S Qo 7 7 Har Dea G9 FUEL FILL SIDE by G m DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE URAN RECIRCULATION Pii TRACTION nm a Pe E 2002 OF CS E X AWDI BRAKE ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG Io VEA DEFMOS AND VENTILATINGFAN WINDOW LOCK ur FOUR WHEEL DES PARC DEFROST HEATED LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE KR fin gt TOW O qp y v tah A mw pf HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD BEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR Tm AIR CONDITIONING 0 WARNING TOW HAUL CO 4 e 5 0 1 A amp 20 A n GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG SUDING DOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER AND TETHER FOR UCONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLUID AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE LOW Y C S88 75 sn MERE QM MERE UNSS CON UE CONTROL OFF 010507683 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injur
198. f view The sensors can detect obstacles from ap proximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orientation of the obstacle Rear ParkSense Warning Display The Rear ParkSense warning display located in the headliner near the liftgate provides both audio and visual warnings to indicate the dis tance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle 032906726 Rear ParkSense LED Display When the ignition is changed to the RUN ON position the warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for approximately one second Each side of the warning display has six yellow and two red LEDs The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the red LED is ON The system illuminates the two outer most yellow LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles The following chart shows the warn ing display operation when the system is de tecting an obstacle 91 DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER 1st LED System ON Yellow None 2nd LED 59 in 150 cm Yellow Yes Half Second 3rd LED 45 in 115 cm Yellow None 4th LED 31 5 in 80 cm 39 in 100 cm Yellow None 5th LED 25 5 in 65 cm 33 5 in 85 cm Yellow None 6th LED 20 in 50 cm 28 in 70 cm Yellow None 7th LED 16 in 40 cm 20 in 50 cm Red Yes Intermittent 8th LED 6 in 15 cm 12 in 30
199. f the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically In addition the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven 175 for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information TPMS Deactivation The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle To deactivate the TPMS first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Sensors Then drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 24 km h 15 mph The TPMS will chime and the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC will display the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message Beginning with the next ignition switch cycle the TPMS will no longer chime or display the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message in the EVIC To reactivate the TPMS replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with tires equipped with TPM sensors Then drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 24 km h 15 mph The TPMS will chime and the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message a 176 maximum of 60 seconds as long as
200. flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle Continued WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in personal injury or property dam age Follow the roof rack cautions when car rying cargo on your roof rack UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 107 e INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE GASOLINE ENGINE 108 e INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE DIESEL ENGINE 109 e INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM GASOLINE ENGINE 222225 uec Se ee me Men 110 e INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM DIESEL ENGINE 111 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 112 e ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC 117 e Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays 118 Engine Oil Change Indicator System 119 esrripiEunctions 119 121 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 124 e SystemiStatus meer ae 126 SOUND SYSTEMS 222222222222 222222022 126 105 106 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 81bf40b4 1 Air Outlet 5 Upper Switch Bank 9 Lower Switch Bank 2 Instrument Cluster 6 Power Outlet Cigar Lighter 10 Climate Controls 3 Radio 7 Storage Bi
201. forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are Still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible Check belt fit periodically A child s squirm ing or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoul der belt under an arm or behind the back LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil
202. full cold positions the air temperature out of the ducts will be full hot or full cold respectively With the temperature setting in these positions the system does not at tempt automatic comfort control The air conditioning in this system is 5 automatic Pressing this button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED to flash three times and remain off This indi cates that the system is in AUTO and request ing the air conditioning is not necessary The system will automatically con trol recirculation However press ing this button will temporarily put the system in Recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present This will cause the LED to illuminate ce 131 NOTE e The surface of the climate control panel and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the climate control sensor s location Mud on the windshield may also cause poor op eration of this system e To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain off until the engine warms up However the fan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is selected or if you manually select a blower speed e Under certain conditions after the vehicle is turned off the climate control system may recalibrate and a noise may be heard for 20 seconds This is part of normal operation 132 Most of the t
203. g from exces sive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe atten tive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel Spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section for more information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS comple
204. gain OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights storage for sunglasses and power sunroof switch if equipped 2 _ 815b4b73 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn these lights on Press a second time to turn the lights off The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is opened The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Key less Entry RKE transmitter is pressed Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sun glasses The storage compartment access is a push push design Push the finger depression on the overhead console to open and a second time to close POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console Power Sunroof Switch WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants par ticularly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while op erating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt prop erly and make sure all passengers are pro
205. ghtened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Sec tion 4 of this manual Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem contin ues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started Refer to Onboard Diagnos tic System in Section 7 of this manual for more information TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the re quirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not
206. gine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or misposi tioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 41 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disas semble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer 42 Defroster Check operation by selecting
207. he Vent button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regard less of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually How ever the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sun roof is open 98 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the per ception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffet ing If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof switches remain active for up approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt 13
208. he ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately six to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunc tion in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup e Y It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the colli Sion type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separa
209. he Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or turning the center of the multifunction lever to the extreme up position will activate all interior courtesy lights 83 Front Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted in the overhead con sole Each light can be turned on by pressing the recessed area of the lens To turn these lights off press the recessed area of the lens a second time There are also reading lights located above the rear doors Each light can be turned on by pressing the front recessed area of the lens To turn these lights off press the recessed area of the lens a second time 813ac107 Front Map Reading Lights 84 Headlight Leveling System If Equipped This system allows the driver to maintain proper headlight beam position with the road surface regardless of vehicle load The headlight level ing switch is located on the upper switch bank To operate rotate the headlight 0 1 L leveling dial to the appropriate 2 z number which corresponds to the Y load listed on the following chart Headlight Leveling Chart 0 Driver only or driver and front passenger 1 All seating positions occupied 2 All seating positions occupied plus an evenly distributed load in the luggage compartment The total weight of passengers and load does not exceed the maximum load capacity of the vehicle 3 Driver plus an evenly distrib uted load in the luggage com partment The total
210. he base ofthe windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Some airflow is deliv ered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained e Floor Air flows through the floor outlets lo e cated under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats Some airflow is delivered to defrost while in floor mode so that comfort can be maintained Bi Level Airflows both through the outlets located the instrument panel and those lo cated on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console and under the front seats to the rear seat passen gers These registers can be closed to block airflow The center console outlets deliver con ditioned air while the floor outlets deliver heated air Panel 7 Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow Depress this button to turn on and off 5 the air conditioning during manual op eration only Conditioned outside air is then directed through the outlets se lected on the mode control dial The button includes an LED that illuminates when manual operation is selected NOTE To manually control the air conditioning the mode selector must be moved out of the AU
211. he engine at moderate speeds for five minutes before full loads are applied Engine Idling In Cold Weather Avoid prolonged idling in ambient tempera tures below 0 F 18 C Long periods of idling may be harmful to your engine because com bustion chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely Incom plete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles Also the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the ngine topping The Engine efore turning off your turbo diesel engine ways allow the engine to return to normal idle peed and run for several seconds This as ures proper lubrication of the turbocharger his is particularly necessary after any period of hard driving o ww Idle the engine a few minutes before routine shutdown After full load operation idle the engine three to five minutes before shutting it down This idle period will allow the lubricating 143 oil and coolant to carry excess heat away from the combustion chamber bearings internal components and turbocharger This is espe cially important for turbocharged charge air cooled engines AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
212. headlights or position lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Front Fog Lights If Equipped The fog light switch is located in the multifunction lever To activate the fog lights turn on the position lights high low beam headlights or the Automatic Headlights and pull out the end of the multi function lever A light in the instrument cluster shows when the fog lights are on 031407687 Front Fog Light Control A front fog light is a lighting device providing illumination in front of the vehicle under condi tions of fog rain snow or dust The front fog lights supplement the low beam of a standard headlight system NOTE Proper aim and adjustments of the front fog lights should be made to prevent excessive glare for other drivers Rear Fog Lights If Equipped To activate the rear fog lights turn on the front position lights or the head lights pull out the end of the multifunc tion lever and rotate the lever to the last detent Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407688 Turn Signal Control If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it woul
213. hicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assem bly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occu pant s chest WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual Continued 25 WARNING Continued e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped n this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear center seating position Children 12 years old and younger should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down ward until the entire belt is fully extended 26 3 Allow the belt to retract As th
214. hicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride EX 7 amp 9 O S 055703771 Tire Rotation Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pres sure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 11 C This means that when the outside temperature de creases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information o
215. hild seats e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used 35 rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section WARNING Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the air bag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to in fants in this position e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufac turer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Continued 36 WARNING Continued A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any r
216. hile the airbag sys tem is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the System immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON The light remains on after the approximate Six to eight second interval The light comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any en gine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good 33 Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of spe cific vehicle data parameters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if ap plicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY re corded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a
217. ian in making repairs Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for Service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability If the indicator light is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed perfor mance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufactur er s warranty MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engi neers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when neces sary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealership or qualified repair center Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performanc
218. ible engine speed for each gear Change gear in good time Do not shift down a gear manually in order to brake SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you uncon Scious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly main tained en
219. icant should be 1 2 inch 1 cm below the oil fill hole Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Selection of Lubricant Use only the manufacturers recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Transfer Case Fluid Level Check Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks If a fluid leak is found the transfer case fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug located on the back side of the transfer case The fluid level should be at the bottom edge of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level position 216 Adding Fluid Add fluid at the filler hole until it runs out of the hole when the vehicle is in a level position Drain First remove fill plug then remove drain plug Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs 20 to 34 Nm CAUTION When installing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only the manufacturers recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Automatic Transmission Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmis Sion performance Use only the manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid Refer to Flu ids Lubricants and Genui
220. icle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another ve hicle This type of start can be dangerous i done improperly so follow this procedure care fully WARNING e Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Continued WARNING Continued e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution that can cause serious burns do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Wear safety glasses and protect your eyes at all times If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contaminated area immedi ately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source that has a greater than 12 Volt system i e do not use a 24 Volt power Source 1 Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might make an un intended electrical contact 2 Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles place the transmission in PARK and turn the ignition OFF 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unneces sary electrical lo
221. if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercar riage at least once a month e Itis important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and tail gate must be kept clear and open e f you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the re sponsibility of the owner e f your vehicle is damaged due to an acci dent or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your ve hicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsi bility of the owner e f you carry special cargo such as chemi cals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e f a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR cleaners or equivalent are recom mended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid auto
222. ight as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be in spected regularly for wear and correct inflation pressure The manufacturer strongly recom mends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in quality and performance when re placement is needed see section on tread wear indicators Failure to use equivalent re placement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recom mend that you contact your local authorized dealer on any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability WARNING Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimen sions and performance characteristics re sulting in changes to steering handling and stress to steering and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Never use a tire smaller than the minimum tire size listed on your vehicle s tire placard unless explicitly instructed to do so by the vehicle manufacturer reference tire chain information in this manual Using an under sized tire could result in tire over
223. ill cause a chime to sound a Low Pressure message to appear in the EVIC and the graphic display will still show the low tire pressure value flashing Driving the ve hicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn off the Low Pressure message as long as none of road tires are below the low pressure warning thresh old The EVIC will also display a SPARE LOW PRESSURE message and the graphic display will show a tire pressure value in place of the flashing low tire pressure value e If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a Low Pressure message and a flashing pressure value in the graphic display After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message and then display dashes in place of the pressure value For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message and then display dashes in place of the pres sure value Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place o
224. ime when in Automatic eration you can temporarily put the sys tem into Recirculation mode by pressing the Recirculation button However under certain conditions in automatic the sys tem is blowing air out of the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and remain off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation mode at this time If you would like to go to Recirculation mode you must first move your mode knob to panel panel floor or floor then hit the Recirculation button This feature will re duce the possibility of window fogging Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Pre ferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic with Manual Air Temperature Control and Manual This means the customer can override the blower mode and disable automatic tem perature control completely NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function dur ing Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart below for details Automatic Temperature Control Operation The System will Mode Air Temperature Air Recirculation A C Operation How Blower Control Control Control Control Operation Full Automatic Set blower knob to either
225. inate for High one for Low and none for Off Press the switch once to select High level heating Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heat ing elements Off al When the High level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal High level If the High level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to Low level after ap proximately 30 minutes of continuous opera tion At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The Low level setting will turn Off automatically after approximately 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes 75 WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medi cation alcohol use exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat CAUTION R
226. ine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 500 miles 20 000 km 12 months J Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 500 miles 20 000 km 12 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 18 750 Miles 30 000 km or 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Rotate tires Replace engine air cleaner filter 1 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 248 25 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a O OO C O C O Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the fuel filter water separator unit Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the CV joints Inspect the transfer case fluid Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repai
227. ing panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle accel eration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recom mended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Engine under Maintenance Procedures in section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of opera tion This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indi cation of difficulty Additional Requirements For Diesel Engine If Equipped During the first 1500 km avoid heavy loads e g driving at full throttle Do not exceed 2 3 of the maximum permiss
228. ing will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average fuel economy in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner 120 FUEL SAVER MODE Average MPG 25 9 Reset 1148 mi Fuel Saver Mode On 819793f8 This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to in crease fuel economy Huer aae MFG 25 9 Pp Reset 819793f4 Fuel Saver Mode Off Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or ve hicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will di
229. ion can cause loss of traction braking ability and control e After going through deep water or a car wash brakes may become wet resulting in decreased performance and unpredictable braking action Dry the brakes by gentle intermittent pedal action while driving at very Slow speeds ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM and Electronic Stability Program ESP All five of these systems work together to enhance ve hicle stability and control in various driving conditions Also your vehicle is equipped with TSC Trailer Sway Control and if it has 4WD with the NV245 two speed transfer case HSA Hill Start Assist and HDC Hill Descent Control Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining ve hicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skid ding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent ac cidents including those resultin
230. ir Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 238 52 500 Miles 84 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t 1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 60 000 Miles 96 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule D Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tT Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 239 67 500 Miles 108 000 km or Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Tt Rotate tires Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals r
231. irrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the pas senger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other objects Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated when ever you turn on the rear window de froster Refer to Rear Window Features in this section for further information Power Outside Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door trim panel next to the power door lock switch A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the off center position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position 811c5cdc Power Mirror Switch Power mirror preselected positions can be con trolled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat If Equipped under Seats in Section 3 for further informa tion Illuminated Vanity Mirrors To access an illuminated vanity mi
232. is ON and the transmis sion is in the NEUTRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position HEADLIGHT WASHERS IF EQUIPPED The multifunction lever operates the headlight washers when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the headlights are turned on The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column To use the headlight washers push the multi function lever inward toward the steering col umn to the second detent and release it The headlight washers will spray a timed high pressure spray of washer fluid onto each head light lens In addition the windshield washers will spray the windshield and the windshield wipers will cycle NOTE The headlight washers will operate on the first spray of the windshield washer and then every tenth spray after that TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering col umn upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Control Handle To unlock the steering column push the control handle downward toward the floor To tilt the Steering column move the steering wheel up ward or downward as desired To lengthen or
233. is light shows the status of the elec trical charging system The light should come on when the ignition Switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase en gine speed if at idle If the charging system 116 light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging sys tem Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in section 6 of this manual 25 Rear Fog Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on 26 Wait To Start Light Diesel Only This light will illuminate when the ignition switch is first turned to the 00 ON position Wait until the light turns off before starting the ve hicle Refer to Starting Proce dures in Section 5 of this manual 27 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light The malfunction light for the Elec tronic Stability Program ESP is combined with Brake Assist Sys tem BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the
234. isible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in this section for proper inspection procedures When replacing tires refer to Tires Gen eral Information in this section for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake sys tem or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inad equate braking and possible personal injury When towing a trailer equipped with a hy draulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 lbs 450 kg and required for trailers in excess of 1 653 lbs 750 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 450 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehi cle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident e Towing any trailer will increase your stop ping distance When towing you should allow for additional space between your
235. ission damage may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL and the engine running With the transfer case in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK refer to steps 7 and 8 above 189 Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Press the brake pedal 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position engine off 3 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 4 Shift the transfer case out of NEUTRAL Hold down the NEUTRAL pin switch with a pen etc for four seconds until the LED lamp by the switch starts to blink indicating shift in progress The lamp will stop blinking go out when shift is complete The 4WD SYSTEM NEUTRAL message will no longer be dis 190 played on the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Neutral Switch 5 Shift the transmission into PARK 6 Start the engine 7 Shift the transmission into DRIVE NOTE When shifting out of transfer case NEU TRAL turning the engine OFF may be re quired to avoid gear clash CAUTION Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch bank just above the climate
236. it feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the fac tory The Easy Entry Exit feature is enabled or later disabled through the program mable features in the Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Cus tomer Programmable Features in Section 4 for more information 79 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be re leased 1 Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel and in front of the driver s door Hood Release 2 Reach under the hood move safety latch to the left and lift the hood 80 031305631 Safety Latch Location CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warn ing could result in serious injury or death LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the headlights turn signals headlight beam selection instrument panel light dimming passing light interior courtesy dome lights and optional fog lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering wheel 031407684 Multifunction Le
237. itions permit 150 WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully en gaging the parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 4WD HI All roads surfaces such as ice snow gravel sand and dry hard pavement NEUTRAL N Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 of this manual 4WD LOW Low speed four wheel drive Locks the fron and rear driveshafts together Forces the fron and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do no exceed 25 mph 40 km h Shifting Procedures 4WD HI to 4WD LOW With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h the ignition switch in the ON position or engine running shift the transmission into NEU TRAL and raise the transfer case T handle The AWD LOW indicator light in the instrument cluster will begin t
238. l UA d 80bbc346 Compass Variance Map 123 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features menu is reached 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to change the variance number Con tinue until desired number is reached 5 Press either MENU SCROLL or COMPASS TEMP button to set the value and exit Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK P Press and release the MENU button until Per sonal Settings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature 124 including the trip functions and the uconnect gps if equipped Press the FUNCTION SE LECT button while in this display to select English Espanol Francais Deutsch or Ital iana Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the remote keyless entry UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors
239. l ing System Pressure Cap paragraph 14 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC messages Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center later in this section 15 TOW HAUL Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL button has been se lected The TOW HAUL button is located in the center of the instru ment panel below the climate controls TOW HAUL 16 4WD LOW Mode Indicator Light If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the 4WD LOW mode LOW The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forc ing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 17 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert in Section 2 for more information 18 Cruise Indicator Light This indicator lights when the CRUISE Speed control system is turned ON 19 Odometer The odometer shows the total dis
240. l Drive Operation 149 Break In Recommendations 40 Four Way Hazard 192 Compartment 202 203 204 Filters Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 149 Compartment Identification 202 203 204 Air 208 Front Axle Differentia 216 PEE 211 Engine Oil 207 Front Heated Seats 74 Exhaust Gas Caution 41 Finish Care n 219 Front Park Sense System 90 Fails to Start 141 Flashers 192 d MM 176 Flooded Starting 141 Hazard Warning 192 Adding lt e ple ja mr has 179 Fuel Requirements 176 230 Turn Signal 42 113 227 228 AdditiV68 4 5 sock saw a 178 Multi Displacement 156 Flipper Glass Liftgate 22 o Conserving 120 Oil Maman da ie Ge se 206 230 Flooded Engine Starting Re 7 141 Diesel s ded ee de de SUE le a rus s 178 Oil Change Interval 206 Fluid Capacities 230 Filler Cap Gas Cap 179 Oil Disposal 207 Fluid Leaks 42 Filler Door Gas Cap 179 Oil Filter a 207 Fluid Level Checks Gasoline 55 s ms da 176 Oil Selection 206 207 230 Automatic Transmission 216 217 Gauge 2222 22 22 4 115 Synthetic 207 Brake LLL 215 Octane Rating 176 Overheating 192 R
241. lar phone has network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect phone Breakdown Service If Equipped f you need Breakdown service e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Breakdown service NOTE The Breakdown service number has to be setup before using To setup press the toO button and say Setup Breakdown Service and follow prompts Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the uconnect phone 59 Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your uconnect phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service Such as a paging service or automated cus tomer service Some services require immedi ate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the uconnect phone When calling a number with your uconnect phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the 6 button and say the sequence you wish to ent r followed by the word Send For examp
242. lay in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will no longer display once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information CHECK TPM SYSTEM Warning The CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer be displayed when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driv ing next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE e If your vehicle is equipped with a match ing full size spare wheel and
243. ld Washers 85 UIC cane 210 Windshield Wiper Blades 209 Windshield Wipers 85 Wipers Intermittent 85 Wipers Rain Sensitive 86
244. le if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the t button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying number or sequence of num bers followed by Send is also to be used for 60 navigating through an automated customer ser vice center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored uconnect phone book entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the ih button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The uconnect phone will then send the corresponding phone num ber associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations this is normal Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command imme diately For example if prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the iS button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts
245. lity The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger the display of the TIRE LOW PRESSURE message Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire 172 Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to regu larly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following compo nents Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire as sembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires A low spare tire will not cause the TIRE LOW PRES SURE message to display or the chime to sound TIRE LOW PRESSURE Warning A TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will disp
246. ll the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already 56 exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit fea ture NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Delete uconnect Phonebook Entry e Press the 2 button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the button while the uconnect phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the uconnect phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All uconnect Phonebook Entries e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt an
247. loading and failure e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can re sult in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control Overloading your tires is dangerous Like under inflation overloading can cause tire failure Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle never overload them 169 CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different Size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings This can also affect ve hicle performance and can do potential dam age to the driveline Check with your dealer before replacing tires with a different size Directional Tread Pattern Tires If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with tires using a directional tread pattern These tires are designed to optimize dry handling as well as wet performance To obtain the full benefits of this design the tires must be installed so that they rotate in the correct direction The rotation direction of this type of tire is indicated by arrows on the side wall of the tire The full size spare tire is mounted as a direct replacement for the right side of the vehicle For a flat tire on the left side of the vehicle the full size spare can be used as mounted If this is required correct the rotation as soon as possible to restore optimum wet performance 170 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Non Directional Tires Only Tires on the front and rear axles of ve
248. lons 79 Liters 3 0L Diesel Engine 22 Gallons 83 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 Quarts 4 7 Liters 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters 3 0L Diesel Engine SAE 5W 30 Synthetic API Certified Low Ash 10 Quarts 9 5 Liters Cooling System 3 7L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or 12 7 Quarts 11 8 Liters equivalent Without Rear Heat 3 7L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or 14 Quarts 13 2 Liters equivalent With Rear Heat 5 7L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or 15 2 Quarts 14 4 Liters equivalent Without Rear Heat 5 7L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or 16 7 Quarts 15 8 Liters equivalent With Rear Heat 3 0L Diesel Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 13 9 Quarts 13 2 Liters Formula or equivalent Without Rear Heat 3 0L Diesel Engine Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 15 3 Quarts 14 5 Liters Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 230 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPARe Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technol ogy or equivalent Engine Oil Non ACEA Categories 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Use A
249. ls press the Window Lockout button again Window Lockout Button Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the per ception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof open ing to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE To open the liftgate pull up squeeze on the handle and lift Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate 81351aac Liftgate Release Liftgate Flipper Glass The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the liftgate is unlocked To open the flipper glass push up on the window switch located on the liftgate 8144ded8 Liftgate Glass Release WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poi sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle WARNING To avoid injury stand back when opening Glass may automatically rise Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass is open NOTE If a malfuncti
250. mance Audio quality is maximized under 64 low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the uconnect phone e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system perfor mance may be compromised with the con vertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose con nection to the uconnect phone When this happens the connection can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system Voice Tree Main Menu Breakdown English UConnect EN Espanol A E Tutorial Francais German Italian Dutch Last Enter Enter Number Name Number on Phone is redialed See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart Number associated Number The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Availa
251. ments the anti lock brake system ABS Apply ing the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the System you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from ex cessive speed in turns driving on very slip pery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 159 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steer ing wheel angle and vehicle speed are suffi cient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers
252. mfortable level while the Voice Recognition VR system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is differ ent than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu 70 In this mode you can say the following com mands e Radio to switch to the radio mode Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands e Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track e Previous
253. n pushing on the cargo light lens surface will turn off all interior lights Push on the lens surface a second time to restore the interior lights to normal operation Rear Storage Compartment The rear storage compartment is located on the driver s side behind the second row seat Rear Storage Compartment Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo To cover the cargo area 1 Grasp the cover at the center handle Pull it over the cargo area 2 Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim cover 3 The liftgate may be opened with the cargo Cargo Tie Down Hooks cover in place The cargo tie downs located on the cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving WARNING Continued e Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passen gers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guide lines for loading your vehicle e Do not carry loads which exceed the load Rear
254. n 11 Ignition Switch 4 Glove Compartment 8 Power Outlet 12 Storage Bin 107 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE GASOLINE ENGINE 9 10 11 22 RPM x 1000 PAINE me 888888 18 6 16 27 15 040306844 108 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE DIESEL ENGINE 9 10 11 22 RPM x 1000 LEFT RERR DOOR OPEN 18616 27 26 040106864 109 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM GASOLINE ENGINE LEFT RERR DOOR OPEN 040306934 110 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM DIESEL ENGINE y 75 a Tu 0120440 LEFT RERR DOOR OPEN 040309169 111 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 2 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake DE functions including brake fluid level and parking brake applica tion If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Pro gram ESP system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been cor rected If the problem is related to the brake 112 boost
255. n ESP back on by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion 161 Full Off AWD Models Only This mode is intended for off highway or off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail con ditions This mode is entered by pressing and holding the ESP OFF switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running After five seconds the ESP TCS Indi cator Light will illuminate and the ESP OFF message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for more information In this mode ESP and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km h At 40 mph 64 km h the system returns to Partial Off mode described above When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESP TCS Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESP is off To 162 turn ESP on again momentarily press the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible
256. n cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and un comfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure for pas senger cars is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar For vehicles other than passenger cars the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on the driver s side B pillar glove box door or the Certifica tion Label The tire pressure should be checked and ad justed at least once every month Check more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with tem perature changes Inflation pressures specified on the chart are always Cold Inflation Pressure Cold inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has been idle for at least
257. n how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire pressure Once the TIRE LOW PRESSURE message appears the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the TIRE LOW PRESSURE message to be turned off The system will automatically update and the TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will turn off once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle has a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pres sure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to display the TIRE LOW PRESSURE message Driving the vehicle may
258. n or title Selling and servicing authorized dealer Vehicle s delivery date and current odometer distance 260 Service history of your vehicle e An accurate description of the problem and the conditions under which it occurs ARGENTINA Chrysler Argentina S A Boulevard Azucena Villaflor 435 C1107CII Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 54 11 4891 7900 Fax 54 11 4891 7901 AUSTRALIA Chrysler Australia Pacific Pty Ltd ACN 004 411 410 Chrysler Vehicle Division P O Box 4214 Mulgrave 3170 Ph 03 9566 9266 AUSTRIA Chrysler Austria Gesellschaft m b H Felmayergasse 2 A 1210 Wien Tel 43 1 5465 15131 Fax 43 1 5465 15132 BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN Interamericana Trading Company Warrens St Michael Barbados West Indies Tel 246 417 8000 Fax 246 425 2888 BELGIUM Chrysler Belgium Luxembourg NV Tollaan 68 B 1200 Brussel Tel 0800 94634 free phone number Fax 32 0 2 717 3301 BOLIVIA Ovando amp Cia S A Av Cristobal de Mendoza 2do Anillo y Canal Isuto Santa Cruz Bolivia Tel 591 3 336 3100 Fax 591 3 334 0229 BRAZIL Chrysler do Brasil Av Alfred Jurzykowski 562 09680 900 S o Bernardo do Campo S P Tel 55 11 4173 6611 Fax 55 11 4173 9200 BULGARIA BALKAN STAR Resbarska Str 5 1510 Sofia Tel 359 2 91988 Fax 359 2 945 40 14 CHILE Comercial Chrysler S A Av Americo Vespucio 1601 Quilicura Santiago Chile Tel 56 2 620 7600 Fax 56 2 73
259. name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For ex ample say Robert Smith or Robert in stead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designa tion e g Home Work Cellular or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if de sired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The uconnect phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a sepa rate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and sup ported by your phone uconnect phone auto matically downloads cellular phone s phone book Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook transfer from Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone uconnect phone automatically down loads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from downloaded or uconnect Phonebook follow the proce dure in Call by Saying a
260. nd Number 1 ULSD Diesel Fuels which reduces the tempera ture at which wax crystals form in fuel NOTE This engine requires the use of Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Use of incorrect fuel could result in exhaust system damage Re fer to Fuel Requirements in this section for further details on fuel recommendations Battery Blanket Usage A battery loses 60 of its cranking power as the battery temperature decreases to O F 18 C For the same decrease in temperature the engine requires twice as much power to crank at the same RPM The use of battery blankets will greatly increase starting capability at low temperatures Suitable battery blankets are available from your authorized MOPAR dealer Engine Starting Procedure WARNING NEVER pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury 1 The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position 3 Watch for the Wait To Start Light in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster in Section 4 of this manual It will glow for two to ten seconds or more depending on engine temperature When the Wait To Start Light goes out the engine is ready to start 4 Tip Start Feature Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key FOBIK t
261. nd maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 11106 and that are approved to Mercedes Benz MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 and ACEA C3 Engine Oil Viscosity CAUTION Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced technology Diesel Engine and an emission device designed to limit Diesel Particulate Emissions from being released into the atmo sphere The durability of your engine and life expectancy of this diesel particulate filter emission device is highly dependent on the use of the correct engine oil SAE 5W 30 Synthetic Low Ash Engine Oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature start ing and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom mended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in this section Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils Do not add supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Filters Care
262. ne Parts in this section for the correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift qual ity and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur ers recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Therefore do not add any fluid additives to the transmis Sion The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmis sion as the chemicals can damage your trans mission components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check 3 7L and 3 0L Diesel Engine Regular fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted If you notice fluid loss or shift lever malfunction have your authorized dealer check the trans mission fluid level CAUTION Using a transmission fluid
263. ng points on the vehicle s frame Refer to the following chart to determine the accurate attaching points Other equip 187 ment such as trailer sway controls and braking equipment trailer equalizing leveling equip ment and low profile mirrors may also be required or strongly recommended M x MOUNTING HOLES gt a VEHICLE CENTERLINE F WHEEL CENTERLINE 813a949e Trailer Tow Hitch Attaching Points And Overhang Dimensions 2 10 ft 638 9 mm 2 45 ft 746 1 mm 2 73 ft 831 1 mm aximum overhang 1 76 ft 535 3 mm A B C D 3 81 ft 1161 5 mm m E F 1 71 ft 520 3 mm 188 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHONE ETC Towing Quadra Trac IIe Quadra Drive 4WD Models CAUTION Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or trans fer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing NOTE The transfer case must be in the NEUTRAL position and the transmission must be in the PARK position for recreational towing WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully en gaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to mo
264. ng your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in 51 cm and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects Maximum speed in 20 in 51 cm of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine oil trans mission oil axle transfer case to assure the fluids have not been contaminated Contami nated fluid milky foamy in appearance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to prevent component damage Driving in Snow Mud and Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to AWD LOW if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion Over revving the engine can Spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the trans mission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to AWD LOW Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills
265. ning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to regu larly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS con sists of the following components Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells 173 e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a graphic disp A tire pressure the spare whee aying tire pressures monitoring sensor is located in if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire as sembly The ma ching full size spare tire can be NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR 34 used in place of any of the four road tires A low spare tire will set the SPARE LOW PRESSURE message but it will not cause the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monito
266. ning of the current track e Jump forward in the current track by press ing and holding the FF gt gt button 127 A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward re spectively for five seconds Use the SEEK and SEEK buttons to jump to the previous or next track If the SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will jump to the previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track If you press the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list e While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata art ist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all screens the last INFO button press will take you back to the play mode Screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod mode to repeat the current playing track e Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which will play the first five seconds of 128 each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode you can also press the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to select the
267. no system fault exists On the next ignition switch cycle the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists General Information Transmitter and receivers operate on a carrier frequency of 433 92 MHz as required by EEC regulations These devices must be certified to conform to specific regulations in each indi vidual country Two sets of regulations are involved ETS European Telecommunication Standard 300 220 which most countries use and German BZT federal regulation 2252125 which is based on ETC 300 220 but has addi tional unique requirements Other defined re quirements are noted in ANNEX VI of COMMIS SION DIRECTIVE 95 56 Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interfer ence e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation FUEL REQUIREMENTS GASOLINE ENGINE 3 7 Engine These engines are designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline with a minimum re search octane rating of 91 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 5 7L Engine Theses engines are designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded
268. nol Methyl or Wood Alcohol is used in a variety of concentrations when blended with unleaded gasoline You may find fuels containing 3 or more Methanol along with other alcohols called cosolvents Problems that result from using ethanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While TBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Ethanol The manufacturer recommends that your ve hicle be operated on fuel containing no more than 10 Ethanol Purchasing your fuel from a reputable supplier may reduce the risk of ex ceeding this 1096 limit and or of receiving fuel with abnormal properties It should also be noted that an increase in fuel consumption should be expected when using Ethanol blended fuels due to the lower energy content of Ethanol Problems that result from using Methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol CAUTION Use of fuel with Ethanol content higher than 10 may result in engine malfunction starting and operating difficulties and materials degra dation These adverse effects could result in
269. nsmission Interlock Manual Override Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with the ignition switch in the ON position and the brake pedal pressed To operate the shift lock manual override per form the following steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position without starting the engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake 3 Using a flat bladed screwdriver carefully remove the shift lock manual override cover which is located on the PRNDL bezel 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override opening Press and hold the shift lock lever down Interlock Manual Override 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL posi tion 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEU TRAL Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual over ride has been used Five Speed Automatic Transmission The electronically controlled transmission pro vides a precise shift schedule The transmis Sion electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Gear Ranges NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a mo ment to allow the selected gear to engage bef
270. ntrol Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check the tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage e Check threaded fasteners for looseness might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After extended operation in mud sand wa ter or similar dirty conditions have brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary particularly on the chassis drivetrain com ponents steering and suspension tighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They e f you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush
271. o briefly turn the igni tion switch to the START position and then release it The starter motor will continue to run and it will automatically disengage when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 20 sec onds The starter can be disengaged by turn ing the ignition switch to the OFF position if required 5 After the engine starts allow it to idle for approximately 30 seconds before driving This allows oil to circulate and lubricate the turbo charger Avoid prolonged idling in ambient tempera tures below O F 18 C Long periods of idling may be harmful to your engine because com bustion chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely Incom plete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles Also the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine Engine Warm Up Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold When starting a cold engine bring the engine up to operating speed slowly to allow the oil pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up NOTE High speed no load running of a cold en gine can result in excessive white smoke and poor engine performance No load en gine speeds should be kept under 1 200 RPM during the warm up period especially in cold ambient temperature conditions If temperatures are below 32 F 0 C operate t
272. o can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the SER VICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in the instrument cluster CAUTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle includ ing small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sen sors will not be detected when they are in close proximity e The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected It is recom mended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense WARNING e Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkSense system Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surround ings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued Before using ParkSense it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles be cause the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
273. o flash and remain on solid when the shift is complete Release the T handle NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met or a transfer case motor temperature protec tion condition exists a CHECK SHIFT PRO CEDURES message will flash from the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Shifter T Handle 4WD LOW to 4WD HI With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h the ignition switch in the ON position or engine running shift the transmission into NEU TRAL and raise the transfer case T handle The AWD LOW indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out when the shift is complete Release the T handle NOTE e If shift conditions interlocks are not met or a transfer case motor temperature pro tection condition exists a CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURES message will flash from the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual e Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is pos sible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be re quired for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h If the vehicle is moving faster
274. om injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together WARNING Continued e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your autho rized dealer and have it fixed 4 bel ap pla Position the lap belt across your thighs ow your abdomen To remove slack in the portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To oosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch te and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a col lision 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Continued 24 WARNING A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug Continued Removing Slack from Belt 6 To release the belt push the red button marked PRESS on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the web bing to allow it to retract fully
275. ommercial service e Off road or desert operation 235 7 500 Miles 12 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Tt 1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 15 000 Miles 24 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tT Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 236 22 500 Miles 36 000 km or 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Tt Rotate tires Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary O O O C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 30 000 Miles 48 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
276. on to the liftgate latch should occur an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emer gency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the lift gate trim panel WARNING Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the vehicle OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passenger 21 e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Cur tains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window if equipped energy absorbing steering column and Steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occu pants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event if equipped All seat belt systems except the drivers include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat
277. on your vehicle e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Over loading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspen sion chassis structure or tires Continued 184 WARNING Continued 1 2 Safety chains must always be used be tween your vehicle and trailer Always con nect the chains to the frame or hook retain ers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the park ing brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed be tween the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded GVWR GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential for the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Infor mation in this section for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or v
278. oor latches should not be used as cargo tie downs 1 Flip up the pull loop s so they are perpen dicular straight up to the top surface of the tray 2 Pull up on the loop s and twist 90 degrees so they are parallel to the slotted hole in the tray 3 Lift the tray over the loop s and reposition the tray 4 Pull up on the loop s and twist 90 degrees so they are perpendicular straight up to the slotted hole in tray 5 Push the loop s back down so they are parallel to the top of the tray REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper washer is controlled by a rotary Switch located on the control lever The control lever is located on the right side of the steering column 031507505 Rear Wiper Washer Control Rotate the switch upward to the On position to activate the rear wiper NOTE The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode only Rotate the switch upward to the washer position to activate that rear washer The washer pump will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged Upon release the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the set position If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position if power accessory delay is active Power accessory delay can be can celled by opening the door if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go
279. operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be pro grammed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identifica tion Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure ocation This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle ignition keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key9 operates on a carrier fre quency of 433 92 MHz The Sentry Key Immo bilizer system will be used in the following European countries which apply Directive 1999 5 EC Austria Belgium Czech Republic Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Luxembourg Nether lands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Russian Federation Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Yugoslavia and United Kingdom Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interfer ence e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation VE
280. or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Im pacted material can cause a wheel imbal ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is inter rupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these conditions you will ob serve a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be ob tained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will in crease the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the powe
281. or sug gested control settings in different weather conditions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubri cation to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost and turning on the high blower The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculation without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the ple num they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow 135 136 138 e ShiftPositions eae 150 e Shifting Procedures 150 Quadra Drive System If Equipped 152 e ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS 152 OFF ROAD DRIVIN
282. or the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and driver s sideview mirror to the desired positions 4 Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions 78 5 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set 6 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key 7 Press and release the S SET button lo cated on the driver s door 8 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 or 2 on the driver s door The next step must be performed within five sec onds if you desire to also use a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions 9 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters 10 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition Switch to the ON position 11 Select Remote Linked to Memory in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and enter Yes Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 for more information 12 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position using the other numbered memory button or to link another RKE transmit ter to memory Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cente
283. or vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Flash Lamps with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Headlamp Off Delay under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features in the Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual To Lock the Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the signal To Release the Liftgate Flipper Glass Press the FLIPPER GLASS LIFTGATE RE LEASE button two times the second press within 5 seconds of the first press to open liftgate flipper glass WARNING Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the vehicle Remote Open Window Feature If Equipped This feature allows you to remotely lower both ront door windows at the same time To use this eature press and
284. ore accelerating This is especially im portant when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position before restarting Transmission gear en gagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the ignition switch is not turned to the LOCK position first PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever into the PARK position WARNING Never use the PARK position as a substi tute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop 145 NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with
285. other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will re sult in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the cor rect fluid type The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the trans mission may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid Level Check 5 7L Engine Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature This occurs af ter at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips To check the fluid level properly the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and nor mal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 4 Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position ending with the shift lever in PARK 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides Th
286. ould affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Im mediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as refer enced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 6 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on o for six to eight seconds as a bulb ry check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible 7 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will 5 turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four sec onds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light
287. our wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Inspect the transfer case fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 241 97 500 Miles 156 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 105 000 Miles 168 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 242 112 500 Miles 180 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service
288. ove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools as shown Connect jack handle driver 1 to two extensions 2 then to the lug wrench 3 060505250 Assembling Jack Tools 1 Jack Handle Driver 2 Extensions 3 Wrench 4 Locate the jack as shown For the front axle place it under the front lower control arm Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 8141842b Front Jacking Location 195 For the rear axle place it under the axle near the wheel to be changed Ensure the jack is closest to the inside of the wheel when jacking on the rear axle Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 8147326d Rear Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 196 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehi
289. ow for setting the instru ment panel lights to full daytime intensity Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Headlights Only This feature prevents the headlights from inter fering with the vision of oncoming drivers Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center potion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instru ment panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel ights when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odom eter and radio when the parking lights or head ights are on 81 Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407549 Dimmer Control Battery Saver Feature Exterior Interior Lights If the multifunction lever is left in the interior light position or the headlight position when the ignition switch is moved to the OFF position the battery saver feature will automatically turn off the exterior and interior lights after eight min utes Normal operation will resume when the ignition is turned ON or when the headlight Switch is turned to another position 82 Lights On Reminder If the
290. perly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any posi tion The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any move ment of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any posi tion The sunroof will close fully and stop auto matically This is called Express Close Dur ing Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an obstruction is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruction if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close 97 Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc pre vents closing the sunroof press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release t
291. phone will call the last num ber that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the uconnect phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality available on the ve hicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone either until the call ends or until a vehicle Specific time expires or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the uconnect phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone for a certain duration after which the call is auto matically transferred from the uconnect phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF uconnect phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the uconnect phone is using e Press the te button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of
292. possible to have the problem diag nosed and corrected NOTE The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ESP System will be ON even if it was previously turned off The ESP Control System will make buzz ing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation 166 TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents e Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle e Over inflated or under inflated tires can af fect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued WARNING Continued Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures ca
293. quipped or selecting a lower gear range using the Elec tronic Range Select ERS feature while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking The transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 of this manual for proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the transmission fluid level before towing 5 7L engine Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you expe rience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily Trailer Hitch Attaching Points Your vehicle will require extra equipment to tow a trailer safely and efficiently The trailer tow hitch must be attached to your vehicle using the provided attachi
294. r 113 Settings Personal 124 Shift Lock Manual Override 144 LD LE dm A 144 Automatic Transmission 144 Shoulder Belts 22 Signals Turn 42 83 113 227 228 Snow Chains Tire Chains 167 Sound Systems Radio 126 Sound Systems Refer to the Sound Systems Booklet SpareTire 193 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 176 Oil estar See E 207 Speed Control Cruise Control 89 Speedometer 112 ci 141 Automatic Transmission 141 Cold Weather 141 Engine Fails to Start 141 Steering POWER ica 155 Tilt OU v s orum eh 87 Wheel Tilt 87 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 129 Storage 225 Storage Behind the Seat 100 Storage 100 Storage Compartment Center Seat 77 Storage Vehicle 135 225 Storing Your Vehicle 225 SUM ROOF ist eve dont pes ras 97 Sunglasses Storage 97 Supplemental Restraint System AIDAGi dl rope Ras Sek 27 Sway Control Trailer 163 Synthetic Engine Oil 207 Tachometer 114 Telescoping Steering Column 87 Temperature Control Automatic ATC
295. r wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING Never use the PARK position as a substi tute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally in jured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition Switch A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disen gaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake sys tem serviced by an authorized dealer imme diately ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separ
296. r EVIC To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button number 1 on the driv er s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 on the driv er s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons on the drivers door dur ing a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be se lected To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion and remove the key 2 Press and release MEMORY button number 1 The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1 Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Press and release the memory S SET but ton located on the driver s door 4 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 on the driver s door 5 Within five seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either memory position repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE transmitter NOTE Once programmed all RKE transmitters linked to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time Refer to Remote Linked
297. r Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 31 250 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Rotate tires If using your vehicle dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 249 37 500 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Replace engine air cleaner filter 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary D Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer 43 750 Miles 70 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary towing Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 250 50 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a O OO C O C O Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air
298. r steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check The power steering system requires the use of OPAR Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid or equivalent which meets Chrysler Ma terial Standard MS 10838 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power Steering system as the chemicals can dam age your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF or other types of power steering fluids when servicing the power steering system of this vehicle Damage to the power steering System can result from the use of the wrong power steering fluid Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is sus pected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as anticipated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer 155 WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accu rate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid f necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS IF EQUIPPED 5 7L ENGINE ONLY This feature offers improve
299. ration will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer to the Note under Torque Con verter Clutch later in this section e During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature This feature improves the warmup time of the engine and transmission If the transmission temperature gets tremely hot the transmission will auto matically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP message may display and the transmission may downshift out of Over drive until the transmission cools down After cool down the transmission will resume normal operation In high ambient temperatures with sustained high engine speed and load an upshift fol lowed shortly thereafter by a downshift may occur The TOW HAUL indicator light will turn off This is normal part of the overheat pro tection strategy when operating in the TOW HAUL mode The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to the most desirable gear if the accelerator 147 pedal is fully pressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When to Use TOW HAUL Mode If Equipped When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent trans mission shifting occurs press the TOW HAUL Switch This
300. rbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemi cals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation con tinues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufac turer s instructions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another colli Sion the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC system servi
301. release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they ower completely Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the Key Fob Insert a small flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door 021305151 Battery Replacement 1 Battery Access Door 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place General Information The RKE transmitter and receivers operate on a carrier frequency of 433 92 MHz as required by EEC regulations These devices must be certi fied to conform to specific regulations in each individual country Two sets of regulations are involved ETS European Telecommunication Standard 300 220 which most countries use and German BZT federal regulation 2252125 which is based on
302. ring Low Pressure Warnings When one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low an audible chime will sound the EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for three seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 174 TIRE 35 PSI 24 SH 34 8197133c Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic displ cles recommended cold tire System will automatically upda display of the pressure value s ay to the vehi pressure The e the graphic will stop flash ing and the Low Pressure text message s will Switch off once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehic be driven for up to 20 minutes e may need to above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information CHECK TPM SYSTEM Warning When a system fault is detected a chime will sound The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message This message is then fol lowed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being re ceived NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR 34 34 81971362 TIRE 35 PSI
303. rned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Automatic Temperature Control ATC The Automatic Temperature Control ATC sys tem automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and passenger 815b5818 Automatic Climate Controls ATC NOTE The numbers on the temperature dial repre sent a comfort setting when the Mode knob is set to Auto and not the actual air tempera ture Begin by turning the right mode knob to AUTO and place the blower control left knob to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occu pants only The HI AUTO position should be used when more air flow is desired or when rear seat occupants are present Dial in the comfort setting you would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver s or passenger s control knob Once the comfort level is se lected the system will maintain that level auto matically using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjust ment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function auto matically Selecting the OFF position on the fan control stops the system completely NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic control operation However if the driver and or pas senger temperature knobs are set to the full hot or
304. rol NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled 85 Windshield Washer Operation To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate or several wipe cycles after the lever is re eased and then resume the intermittent inter val previously selected fthe lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the wind shield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the de froster before and during windshield washer use Mist Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers neces sary Pull down and release the control lever for a single wiping cycle 86 031507504 Mist Control Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield wash ers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
305. rol HDC 4WD Models With NV245 Two Speed Transfer Case Only HDC maintains vehicle speed while descend ing hills during off road driving situations and is available in 4WD LOW range only To enable HDC transfer case must be in 4WD LOW range press the HDC switch If the HDC Switch is pressed when the vehicle is not in 4WD LOW range the light in the switch will flash for five seconds and HDC will not be enabled Hill Descent Switch When HDC is properly enabled the message HILL DESCENT CONTROL will appear in the EVIC and the light in the switch will be illumi nated HDC will automatically apply the brakes to control downhill speed when necessary HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only activate when the vehicle is descending a hill It will usually not activate on level ground The HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corre sponds to the transmission gear selected e 1st 1 mph 1 6 km h e 2nd 2 5 mph 4 km h 3rd 4 mph 6 km h e 4th 5 5 mph 9 km h 5th 7 5 mph 12 km h e REVERSE 1 mph 1 6 km h NEUTRAL 2 5 mph 4 km h e PARK HDC will not function HDC also has the capability to sense rough terrain and will automatically adjust to a slightly slower set speed about 0 3 mph 0 5 km h than normal HDC operation can be overridden with brake application to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed Conversel
306. rols Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Press ing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM TAPE CD etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of 129 the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previ ous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc 130 The center button on the left side rocker swit
307. rror flip down one of the sun visors Lift the cover to reveal the mirror The light will turn on automatically Illuminated Vanity Mirror uconnect phone IF EQUIPPED NOTE For uconnect phone with Navigation or Multimedia radio refer to the Navigation or Multimedia radio s User s Manual separate booklet phone section phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system uconnect phone allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Jim Work or Dial 151 1234 5555 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s au dio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the uconnect phone uconnect phone allows you to transfer calls between the uconnect phone and your cellu lar phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the uconnect phone s microphone for private conversation The uconnect phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free profile cellular phone uconnect phone features Bluetooth technol ogy the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so uconnect phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been pair
308. rs Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue FUSES Interior Fuses The fuse panel is on the lower instrument panel just to the left of the steering column Fuse Panel Car tridge Description ity en Fuse P 1 30 Amp Audio Amp B Green 2 15 Amp Sunroof B Blue 3 10 Amp Htd Mirror EBL Red 4 20 Amp Rr Pwr Out B Yellow 5 10 Amp Rr HVAC R O R
309. sed without pushing in the button Adjustable Head Restraints 74 WARNING Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head restraints should always be checked prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK Front Heated Seats If Equipped The front driver and passenger seats are heated The controls for each heater are lo cated near the bottom center of the instrument panel below the heater air conditioning con trols The heaters provide the same average heat level for both the cushion and the seat back After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off Press the switch once to select High level heating Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heat ing elements Off When the High level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal High level If the High level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to Low level after ap proximately 30
310. select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Ad vanced Phone Connectivity Dial by Saying a Number Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial e The system will prompt you to say the num ber you want to call e For example you can say 151 1234 5555 e The uconnect phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the o button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call e The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call 54 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the uconnect phonebook or down loaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook e The uconnect phone will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone num ber which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the uconnect phone book is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the 2 button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the
311. specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owners Manual for specific in structions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters 55 Edit uconnect Phonebook Entries Editing names in the phonebook is recom mended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone num ber for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook ca
312. speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED Rear ParkSense If Equipped Rear ParkSense provides audio and visual indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle when back ing up Refer to the Warning Section and NOTE Section for limitations of this system and rec ommendations Rear ParkSense will remember the last system state enabled or disabled from the last igni tion cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN ON position Rear ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If the Rear Park Sense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will be active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will be active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h Rear ParkSense Sensors The four Rear ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field o
313. splay Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position Display Units of Measure In To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and hold the FUNC TION SELECT button for two seconds Current display will reset along with other functions Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Press and release the COMPASS TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature Automatic Compass Calibration When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated To complete the calibration process drive slowly 5 mph 8 km h in one or more complete circles in an area free from magnetic material until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The Compass will now function normally NOTE A
314. ss of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause seri ous damage to the engine Under normal operating conditions the cata lytic converter will not require maintenance However it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst opera tion and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your ve hicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat result ing in possible damage to the converter and vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions con trol systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such ma terials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunc
315. t wheels With a traction difference between left and right wheels the coupling will sense a speed differ ence As one wheel begins to spin faster than the other torque will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less traction to the wheel that has traction While the transfer case and axle couplings differ in design their operation is similar Follow the Quadra Trac 11 transfer 152 case shifting information preceding this sec tion for shifting this system ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road appli cations Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu vers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS NOTE Prior to off road driving remove the front air dam to prevent damage The front air dam is attached to the lower front fascia with quar ter turn fasteners and can be removed by hand
316. t you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel 15 ppm Sulfur maximum and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel 500 ppm Sulfur maximum to avoid dam age to the emissions control system For most year round service No 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D 975 Grade 515 will provide good performance If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold below 20F or 7C or is required to operate at colder than normal conditions for prolonged periods use climatized No 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No 2 diesel fuel with 50 No 1 diesel fuel This will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax plugging of the fuel filters This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5 biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D 975 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Transfer Case MOPAR NV 247 245 Transfer Case Lubricant or equivalent Axle Differential Front Rear MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 API GL5 or equivalent with friction modifier additive Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir This system requires the use of MOPAR Hydraulic Syst
317. tance the vehicle has been driven 20 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK 21 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 22 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is de e the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the 115 light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the System checked by an authorized dealer 23 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 24 Charging System Light Th
318. te and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passen ger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC Airbags de pending on severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the win dow The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to chil dren The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Be
319. tem Storage Rear Seat Armrest If Equipped The rear seat may be equipped with a center storage armrest 781556214 Rear Seat Armrest Press the latch and lift the top of the armrest to access the storage bin Armrest Storage Latch DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED Once programmed the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the drivers door panel can be used to recall the driver s seat driver s outside mirror adjustable brake and accelerator pedals and radio station preset settings Your Remote Key less Entry RKE transmitters can also be pro grammed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed Driver Memory Switches Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE trans mitters One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory position The memory 77 System can accommodate up to four RKE transmitters each one linked to either of the two memory positions Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory NOTE Each time the S SET button and a num bered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition Switch to the ON position 2 Press the driver door MEMORY button num ber 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1 or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2 The system will recall any stored settings Wait f
320. the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 3 Turn Signal Indicator The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is op erated A tone will chime if the turn sig nals are left on for more than 1 mile 1 6 km 4 High Beam Indicator Light z Indicates that headlights are on high beam 5 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL B is part of an onboard diagnostic sys tem called OBD Il that monitors en gine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situa tions the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also c
321. the Electronic Speed Control is set you can increase speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is con 89 tinually held in the RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h 3 7L 5 7L and 3 0L diesel engines speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h 8 7L 5 7L and 3 0L diesel engines To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the SET DECEL lever If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be estab lished Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases To Accelerate for Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed 90 Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system main tains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater
322. the FUNCTION SELECT button to select the displayed function YES Y or NO N SCROLL Button Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features and System Status Messages COMPASS TEMPERATURE Button Press and release the COMPASS TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature 117 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e TURN SIGNAL e PERFORM SERVICE e DAMAGED KEY KEY DOES NOT COM MUNICATE KEY NOT PROGRAMMED KEY NOT PRO GRAMMED WRONG KEY KEY DOES NOT BELONG TO VEHICLE e KEY NOT PROGRAMMED EXCEEDED KEY PROGRAM LIMIT PROGRAMMING ACTIVE NEW KEY PRO GRAMMED SERVICE SECURITY KEY DRIVER PASSENGER DOOR OPEN with graphic LEFT RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN with graphic 118 X DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE DOOR OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGLASS OPEN with graphic HOOD OPEN with graphic HOOD DOOR OPEN with graphic HOOD DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE HOOD OPEN with graphic HOOD GLASS DOOR OPEN with graphic HOOD GLASS DOORS OPEN with graphic HOOD GATE DOOR OPEN with graphic HOOD GATE DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGLASS DOOR OPEN with graphic LIFTGLASS DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGLASS HOOD OPEN
323. the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exte rior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and lock ing Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight park ing for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately Advanced Phone Connectivity 61 Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone eds se P 62 VOICE RECOGNITION VR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 69 Voice Recognition VR System Operation 69 o Commands adn poo a A een eon 70 Voice Training lt c scc ceea anem eaa a 71 e SEATS 252202225020 050002220002
324. the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the sys tem OFF when you are not using it To Set a Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you or normal brake pressure while slowing the ve hicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Press ing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition Switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h for 3 7L and 5 7L engines and 14 mph 23 km h for 3 0L diesel engines To Vary the Speed Setting When
325. this section only the combined form of the voice com mand is given You can also break the com mands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the uconnect phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speak ing to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the uconnect phone from idle simply press the button and follow the audible prompts for directions All uconnect phone sessions begin with a press of the to button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link uconnect phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your uconnect phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone refer to Compatible Phones section to learn about the phone type To complete the pairing process
326. tible child seats having flex 38 ible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attach ment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehi cle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child re straints using the vehicle s seat belts For typi cal installation instructions refer to Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint Sys tem Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were pro vided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfac
327. to button until you hear a single beep 57 Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the tO button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the but ton while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Mak ing a Second Call While Current Call in Progress After the second call has estab lished press and hold the 4 button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two Calls have been joined into one conference call 58 Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the to button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the te button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The uconnect
328. ty when parts which are expressly authorized or recommended by the manufacturer are attached or installed at an authorized dealer The same applies when modifications to the original condition are sub sequently made on the manufacturers ve hicles Your warranties do not cover any part that the manufacturer did not supply Nor do they cover the cost of any repairs or adjustments that might be caused or needed because of the installation or use of non manufacturer parts components equipment materials or addi tives Nor do your warranties cover the costs of repairing damage or conditions caused by any changes to your vehicle that do not comply with the manufacturers specifications Original Mopar parts and accessories and other products approved by the manufacturer including qualified advice are available at your authorized dealer When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satis faction Copyright 2009 Chrysler International HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you de sire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a compl
329. udible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable In an emergency evasive maneu ver the ESP and ERM systems will not en gage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off mode is intended for off road use only Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an exces sively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is required Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Tow ing in Section 5 of this manual for more infor mation on towing a trailer with your vehicle When TSC is functioning the ESP TCS Indica tor Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the Partial Off or Full Off modes
330. ugh a 16 pin con nector using the provided interface cable UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s website for software up dates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port connecting an iPod to this port does not play the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port in the glove com partment on some vehicles e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays me dia but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port which is located in the glove compartment on some vehicles Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE You may have to remove the connector pin protection cap from the 16 pin con nector port prior to connecting the cable e If the iPod battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the re quired level Using This Feature By using the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI
331. upant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the impact sen sors at the front of the car The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deploy ment The timing of the second stage deter mines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the remaining gas in the inflator is ex pended 28 WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective cov ers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citi zen band radios etc Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC airbags offer side impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat out board occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features in flated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the poten tial for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side 022606177 Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Location NOTE e Shoul
332. ure Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection Driver and Front Passenger Door Only Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automati cally To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window Switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the win dow Any impact due to rough road condi 20 tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during Auto Up If this hap pens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the window manu ally WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Resetting the Auto Up Feature Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up Pull the window switch up and close the win dow completely then pull and hold the switch for one second Window Lockout Button The Window Lockout button on the driver s door allows you to disable the window controls on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the Window Lockout button To enable the window contro
333. utlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e f this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these intermittently and with greater caution e After the use of high power draw accesso ries or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 99 CUPHOLDERS There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers located in the center console 4 Front Cupholders The rear passengers have access to two cup holders that pull out from the lower center of the rear seat 100 Rear Cupholders CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Light The cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate opening any door or by rotating the dimmer control on the multifunction lever to the extreme top position If all doors are closed and only the liftgate is ope
334. uts and tight ness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating tempera ture but not running check the cooling sys tem pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant 212 recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOL ANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to re move all deposits and chemicals Properly dis pose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended en gine coolant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lu bricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type CAUTION Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than the specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the
335. ve even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Shifting Into NEUTRAL Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEU TRAL before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Press the brake pedal 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position engine off 3 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 4 Shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL Hold down the NEUTRAL pin switch with a pen etc for four seconds until the LED lamp by the switch starts to blink indicating shift in progress The lamp will stop blinking stay on solid when the NEUTRAL shift is complete A AWD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL message will display on the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Neutral Switch 5 Start the engine 6 Shift the transmission into DRIVE 7 Release the brake pedal and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 8 Turn the engine off 9 Shift the transmission into PARK 10 Place the ignition switch in the OFF posi tion and remove the key fob 11 Apply the parking brake 12 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle with tow bar 13 Release the parking brake CAUTION Transm
336. ver Headlights and Front Position Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for parking light operation Turn to the second detent for headlight operation 031407605 Headlight Switch Automatic Headlights If Equipped Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the third detent AUTO to activate the Automatic Headlight system 031407690 Automatic Headlight Operation This system performs two functions With the engine running and the multifunction lever in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on and off based on the surrounding light levels Headlights On Automatically With Wipers If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it also has this customer programmable feature When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is running they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on If your vehicle is equipped with a Rain Sensi tive Wiper System and it is activated the headlights will automatically turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within ap proximately one minute and they will turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop Refer to Windshield Wipers and Washers in this Section for more informa tion NOTE When your headlights come on during the daytime the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime intensity Refer to Instrument Panel and Interior Lights bel
337. ways ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deploy ment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passen ger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoulder belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate Do not lean against the door If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be mo
338. when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant an tifreeze and will require more frequent en gine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine cool ant antifreeze when the engine is over heated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or engine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethyl
339. when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 sec onds then repeat the Normal Starting proce dure Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these tempera tures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your autho rized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails to Start WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious per sonal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the con verter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly Refer to Section 6 for proper jump starting procedures and follow them care fully 141 If the engine fails to start after you have fol lowed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the acceler
340. will be Cooler As the knob is rotated clockwise the temperature will increase gradually until the non automatic comfort condition The numbers on the Temperature dial are no longer valid in this mode This mode allows the user to select any desired air temperature When the temperature knob is in full conterclockwise position the air temperature nob reaches the full clockwise position 817dd45b 133 NOTE Regardless of the type of operation when a temperature knob is set to the full clockwise or full counterclockwise position the sys tem will deliver full hot or full cold air out of the ducts respectively The operator can override the AUTO mode setting and select the direction of the air by rotating the right mode knob to one of the following positions When the Mode is set to any position other than AUTO The automatic control of air temperature is disabled The user must adjust the temperature knobs to obtain the desired temperature Defrost Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the wind shield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demis ter grilles Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be main tained 134 NOTE The defrost mode is not automatically se lected It must be manually selected when desired Defrost Floor Qt e Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets and the outlets at t
341. wist the short buckle end belt several times to Shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out 39 If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Discon nect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap Route the tether strap over the seatback and headrests and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat WARNING Always remove the subwoofer from the ve hicle whenever the tether anchors behind the subwoofer are required for proper installation of a child restraining device In the event of an accident or under severe vehicle maneuvers leaving the subwoofer unsecured in the ve hicle could result in serious or fatal injury to anyone in the vehicle 40 Tether Strap Mounting WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor posi tions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passen ger dur
342. y Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 253 87 500 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Q If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 93 750 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Rotate tires A Replace engine air cleaner filter Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 254 100 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a C C Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the fuel filter water separator unit Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the CV joints
343. y It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could re sult in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss impor tant information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is found on a plate located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This num ber also is stamped into the right front door sill under the molding Door Sill VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death 10 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition Switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operat ing positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The detented positions are LOCK ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch
344. y if more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the usual manner When either the brake or the accelera tor is released HDC will control the vehicle back to the original set speed HDC is intended for low speed off road driv ing only At vehicle speeds above 30 mph 48 km h HDC will no longer function When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph 48 km h HDC function will automatically re sume and the vehicle speed will return to the chosen set speed WARNING HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for main taining a safe vehicle speed ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS Warning Light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both go out with the engine running ESP BAS 165 If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after several igni tion switch cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as
345. y cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driv ing style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU but ton To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indica tor system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode Distance To Empty e Trip A e Trip B Elapsed Time Service Distance Display Units of Measure In 119 Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following information Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averag

1 - Silberauto

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents